You are on page 1of 330

Chapters.

1 Shopping in the U.S. p. 03

2 Return Policy p. 23

3 Shopping for Clothes p. 45

4 Sizes and Measures p. 67

5 Shopping for Shoes p. 88

6 Shopping for Cosmetics p. 108

7 Shopping for Electronics p. 127

Arquivo Interativo.
Interações no menu ao
lado, topo e base das
8 Shopping for Appliances p. 146

páginas, e nas indicações

9 Online Shopping
do Grammar Guide no
final de cada lesson. p. 168

10 Grammar Guide p. 188


Shopping
in the U.S.
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

When we talk about sales, we can’t ignore that the United States has great
potential. There is a whole system to please the customers and make sure they
will be back for more. So, in this chapter, you will see some tips on how to enjoy
this shoppers’ paradise to the fullest. Besides that, you will also learn some
language items that will help you improve your English skills. Now, look at the
script of Shopping in the U.S.

SHOPPING IN THE U. S.

[On Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
So, you’re in the U.S. on vacation! You’re probably going to do some
shopping, right? Yes! You’re totally going to do some shopping! The U.S.
is one of the biggest shopping destinations, filled with so many offers
beyond belief! My name is Amy, and here I am on Rodeo Drive, which is
one of the most iconic shopping destinations in the U.S. I don’t know if I
can afford to be here!

[On Third Street Promenade]


Lucas:
Hey, everybody! My name is Lucas, and I’m right here at Third Street
Promenade! Now, in this series, we’re going to make sure that you’ll
have all the tips, so you don’t get lost. But I can’t guarantee that you’re
not going to get carried away!

[On Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
To get started, if you intend on doing any shopping in the U.S., you’ll
have to understand something called sales tax. Why is it so important?
Because the price you see on the tag does not include sales tax.

[On Third Street Promenade]


Lucas:
The sales tax is a combination of the states’ sales tax and the local city’s
sales tax, which is why you see that it varies not only from state to state,
but also from city to city. So, for example, in California, the sales tax is a
combination of the state sales tax and, on average, the local city’s sales
tax will make it be about 9%. Which means that you’re going to be
paying 9% more on average than what the price tag is telling you.

< voltar para o índice


4
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[On Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
So, I’m going to let you in on a little secret. There are actually four
states in the U.S. that do not charge sales tax. They are Oregon, New
Hampshire, Montana, and Delaware. So, keep that in mind if the main
purpose of your trip is to go shopping.

[On Third Street Promenade]


Lucas:
If shopping is still one of the main purposes of your visit, but you don’t
plan on visiting any of those four states, another tip that we can give you
is that, in a few states, international customers can qualify for a sales tax
refund. This means that the money that you spend on sales taxes can
go back to you before you leave. And remember, this is a state by state
policy, so I recommend that you do your research before you travel.

[On Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
Now that you’re familiar with the sales tax, let’s talk about options! You
can find almost any item imaginable for sale in America! You’ll find all
sorts of sales! There’s the “buy one, get one free,” which is the “BOGO”
sale. “Buy one, get one half off,” “buy two, get one free”…you get the
idea…There are so many sales!

[Lucas and Amy are at a store]


Lucas:
So, we actually have someone that’s going to help us answer a couple of
questions, this is Lucy, and Lucy, you’re a sales associate, right? Can you
describe what a typical interaction is between you and a customer?

Lucy:
Sure! Well, typically if someone has a question for me about a product
or they’re trying to find something, they’ll come up to me and say, “Hi,
excuse me, can I ask you a question? Where would I find a nightgown?”
And then I’ll tell them where to find it. Or maybe they want to know,
“Does it come in a different size?” So, they’ll say, “Hey, does this shirt
come in size small?”

Lucas:
And one important thing I think to note is that Lucy works at a store that
has a lot of different departments in it. So, a giant store like the one that
we’re in right now, where you might then often direct people to certain
departments, or certain sections of the store.

< voltar para o índice


5
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Lucy:
Exactly! Where are electronics and things like that!

Amy:
Do you think that there’s a big difference between working in a larger
store like this versus a boutique, with the salesperson experience?

Lucy:
I think so. I think a salesperson in a boutique is much more...sort of
intimate interaction, where maybe I would really be helping them try to
pick out an outfit or something like that. Whereas in a bigger store, not
so much.

Lucas:
It’s important to know exactly how to approach someone and, correct
me if I’m wrong, but one very safe way to approach a customer service
representative is just by walking up to them, getting close to them, so that
they can hear you say, “Hey, excuse me. Can you help me with something?”
We appreciate you, Lucy! Thank you for helping us out with this!

Lucy:
Absolutely! My pleasure!

COMPRANDO NOS E .U. A .

[Na Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
Você está de férias nos EUA! Você provavelmente vai fazer compras,
certo? Sim! Você com certeza vai fazer compras! Os EUA são um dos
maiores destinos para compras, repletos de ofertas que são difíceis
de acreditar! Meu nome é Amy. Estou na Rodeo Drive, que é um dos
destinos mais icônicos para compras nos EUA, e eu não sei se tenho
grana para estar aqui!

[Na Third Street Promenade]


Lucas:
Oi, pessoal! Meu nome é Lucas, e estou aqui na Third Street Promenade!
Nesta série, vamos garantir que você tenha todas as dicas para não se
perder! Mas não posso garantir que você não vá se deixar levar!

< voltar para o índice


6
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Na Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
Para começar, se você pretende fazer compras nos EUA, você precisa
entender algo chamado imposto sobre vendas. Por que ele é tão
importante? Porque o preço que você vê na etiqueta não inclui o
imposto sobre a venda.

[Na Third Street Promenade]


Lucas:
O imposto sobre vendas é uma combinação da tributação sobre vendas
do estado e a tributação municipal. É por isso que podemos ver uma
variação não somente entre estados, mas também de cidade para
cidade. Por exemplo, na Califórnia, esse imposto é a combinação da
tributação estadual com o imposto municipal, que resulta, em média, em
9%. Isso significa que você, via de regra, vai pagar 9% a mais do que o
preço que aparece na etiqueta.

[Na Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
Vou contar um segredinho: existem quatro estados nos EUA que não
cobram imposto sobre vendas. Eles são Oregon, New Hampshire,
Montana e Delaware. Considere isso se a razão principal da sua viagem
for fazer compras.

[Na Third Street Promenade]


Lucas:
Se fazer compras ainda é uma das razões principais da sua visita, mas
você não tem planos de visitar esses quatro estados, outra dica que
podemos dar é que, em alguns estados, clientes internacionais podem
pedir a restituição desses impostos. Ou seja, o dinheiro que você
gastar nesses tributos pode ser reembolsado antes de você partir. Mas
lembrem: isso é uma política que varia de estado para estado; então,
aconselho que você faça uma pesquisa antes de viajar.

[Na Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
Agora que você se familiarizou com o imposto sobre vendas, vamos
falar de opções! Você pode encontrar quase tudo imaginável à venda
nos Estados Unidos! Você vai encontrar todo tipo de promoção! Temos
a “compre um, leve dois”, que é conhecida como promoção “BOGO”.
“Compre um e ganhe 50% na segunda unidade”, “compre dois e ganhe
o terceiro”... vocês entenderam... há muitas promoções!

< voltar para o índice


7
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Amy e Lucas estão numa loja]


Lucas:
Temos aqui alguém que vai nos ajudar a responder algumas perguntas:
o nome dela é Lucy, e você é uma representante de vendas, certo? Você
poderia descrever como é a interação entre você e um cliente?

Lucy:
Claro! Normalmente, se alguém tem dúvida sobre um produto, ou se
está tentando achar algo, vai vir falar comigo e dizer: “Oi, com licença!
Eu poderia fazer uma pergunta? Onde posso achar uma camisola?” E,
então, eu informo onde a pessoa pode achá-la. Ou talvez queiram saber
se um artigo é vendido em outro tamanho. Então, vão perguntar: “Você
tem essa camisa no tamanho P?”

Lucas:
E algo importante de se lembrar é que a Lucy trabalha em uma loja com
diferentes departamentos. Logo, em uma loja grande, com o mesmo
tamanho da loja em que estamos agora, você pode acabar encaminhando
clientes para outros departamentos, ou outras partes da loja.

Lucy:
Exatamente! Onde fica a parte de eletrônicos e coisas do tipo.

Amy:
Você acha que há uma grande diferença entre trabalhar em uma loja
maior como essa e em uma boutique, quando o assunto é trabalhar com
vendas?

Lucy:
Sim. Acho que a relação de um vendedor em uma loja menor é bem
mais intimista; é uma interação em que eu estaria dando mais apoio ao
cliente ao tentar escolher um look ou algo do tipo. Já em uma loja maior,
essa situação não acontece.

Lucas:
É importante saber como chamar a atenção de alguém, e, por favor, me
corrija se eu estiver errado, mas um jeito simples de se pedir ajuda a um
vendedor é apenas se aproximar, para que ele possa te ouvir, e dizer:
“Com licença, você poderia me dar uma ajuda?” Muito obrigado, Lucy!
Obrigado por nos ajudar!

Lucy:
Sem problemas! O prazer é todo meu!

< voltar para o índice


8
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Depending on the kind of store, there will be a difference in the price of the products and the
kind of assistance you can get.
If you are looking for something specific, go to one of these stores:

KINDS OF STORES

Shoe stores
Clothing stores Cosmetics stores
Lojas de calçados /
Lojas de roupas Lojas de cosméticos
Sapatarias

You can easily find all that in shopping malls. At specialized stores, the
salespeople will probably approach you and say:

Good afternoon, can I help you with anything?


Boa tarde, posso te ajudar com alguma coisa?

Hello, my name is (Erin). Let me know if you need any help.


Oi, meu nome é (Erin). Me avise se precisar de alguma coisa.

If you need assistance, you can say:


Yes, please. I’m looking for a perfume.
Sim, por favor. Estou procurando um perfume.

< voltar para o índice


9
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And if you don’t need help, you can say:

Thanks, I’m just browsing around.


Obrigado, eu só estou dando uma olhada.

In department stores, you look for what you need


by yourself, and if you need assistance, you may Excuse me.
approach a sales associate by saying: Com licença.

And then you should greet the person:

GREE TINGS

Good morning. Good evening.


Bom dia. Boa noite.

Good afternoon. Good night.


Boa tarde. Boa noite. / Tenha uma
boa noite de sono.

Remember: we do not say Good night to greet people. It is a kind of farewell to


wish someone a good night’s sleep.

Now, to mention what you need, you can say:

I’m looking for the electronics section, please.


Estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos, por favor.

Where can I find home appliances?


Onde posso achar eletrodomésticos?

Where is the fitting room?


Onde é/fica o provador?

< voltar para o índice


10
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The sales associate may offer to take you to the section or just
give you the directions to get there, for example:

The electronics are on the third floor.


Os eletrônicos estão/ficam no terceiro andar.

The home appliances are on aisle number 10.


Os eletrodomésticos estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

The fitting room is upstairs.


O provador é/fica no andar de cima.

Remember to thank them and say farewell.


For example:

Thank you. Have a nice day.


Obrigado(a). Tenha um bom dia.

Thanks a lot. Have a nice one.


Muito obrigado(a). Tenha um bom dia!

Thanks for your help.


Obrigado(a) pela sua ajuda.

Even though the following farewells are very common, they are too
informal, unfit for this situation. So, avoid saying:

See you later. See you soon.


Te vejo mais tarde. Te vejo em breve.

After you thank the associate and


say farewell, they may answer: Anytime. / Not at all.
Disponha. / Não há de quê.

< voltar para o índice


11
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The United States is well-known for its amazing discounts and


combos. Let’s take a look at some popular ones:

T YPES OF SALES

Buy one, get one free


Compre 1, leve 2

Buy one, get one half-off


Compre um e ganhe 50% de desconto na segunda unidade

Buy two, get one free


Compre 2, leve mais 1 / Leve 3, pague 2

Remember that the price you see on the price tag is not the final
amount you are going to pay. You have to add the sales taxes to it.
Sales taxes vary from state to state; that’s why it is really important
to do some research before you travel to learn these values. You
may use an online research website and type:

Sales tax in the U.S. + current year


Imposto sobre vendas nos Estados Unidos + ano vigente

Depending on the state, you may get a tax refund. Check if the
state you are visiting has this policy by typing:

Sales tax refund + (Texas) + tourists


Reembolso de impostos sobre vendas + (estado de sua preferência) + turistas

Now you know how to approach and interact with a


salesperson, some common sales in the U.S., and some
important information on sales taxes.

< voltar para o índice


12
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Shoe store ( ) Dar uma olhada

( 2 ) Clothing store ( ) Provador

( 3 ) Cosmetics store ( ) Loja de calçados / Sapataria

( 4 )T
 o browse around ( )T
 erceiro andar

( 5 ) Electronics section ( ) Andar de cima

( 6 ) Home appliances ( ) Loja de roupas

( 7 ) Fitting room ( ) Eletrodomésticos

( 8 ) Third floor ( ) Corredor

( 9 ) Aisle ( ) Imposto sobre vendas

( 10 ) Upstairs ( ) Loja de cosméticos

( 11 ) Sales tax ( ) Reembolso de imposto

( 12 ) T
 ax refund ( )S
 eção de eletrônicos

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) Thank you. . d) Where can I find ?


Obrigado(a). Tenha um bom dia. Onde posso achar eletrodomésticos?

b) Thanks, I’m just . e) Where is the ?


Obrigado, eu só estou dando uma olhada. Onde é/fica o provador?

c) I’m looking for the , f) The fitting room is .


please. O provador é/fica no andar de cima.
Estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos,
por favor.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers c. electronics section


4 / 7 / 1 / 8 / 10 / 2 / a. Have a nice day / d. home appliances
6 / 9 / 11 / 3 / 12 / 5 Have a nice one e. fitting room
b. browsing around f. upstairs

< voltar para o índice


13
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we are going to talk about the simple present of the verb to be, the
present continuous, subject pronouns, the question word where, and the spelling
rules of verbs in the -ING form.
We use the verb to be to talk about location, feelings, nationality, characteristics,
occupation, among others. Let’s see some examples that convey location. Check it out:

The electronics are on the third floor.


Os eletrônicos estão/ficam no terceiro andar.

The home appliances are on aisle number 10.


Os eletrodomésticos estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

The fitting room is upstairs.


O provador é/fica no andar de cima.

Now, let’s take a look at the structure of the verb to be:

VERB TO BE

Affirmative Form
SUBJECT + VERB TO BE + COMPLEMENT
Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Complemento

Negative Form
SUBJECT + VERB TO BE + NOT + COMPLEMENT
Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Not + Complemento

Interrogative form
VERB TO BE + SUBJECT + COMPLEMENT
Verbo To Be + Sujeito + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


14
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And even though the verb to be has a different conjugation for each person, this
general structure won’t change. We very often use it with subject pronouns.
Let’s take a look at them:

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS

Singular Plural

I = eu we = nós
you = tu; você you = vós; vocês
he = ele (gênero masculino) they = eles; elas ( pessoas,
she = ela (gênero feminino) animais, coisas, lugares,
sentimentos, ideias, etc.)
it = ele; ela (exceto pessoas); isso

Remember: the subject pronouns replace both proper and common nouns
when they are the subject of the sentence. Let’s see how it works with the verb
to be. First, in the affirmative form:

SIMPLE PRESENT – TO BE
Affirmative Form

I am / I’m It is / It’s
Eu sou/estou Ele/Ela/Isso é/está

You are / You’re We are / We’re


Tu és/estás; Você é/está Nós somos/estamos

He is / He’s You are / You’re


Ele é/está Vós sois/estais; Vocês são/estão

She is / She’s They are / They’re


Ela é/está Eles/Elas são/estão

As you can see, all conjugations accept a contracted form of the subject
pronouns with the verb to be.
In the negative form, as we have already seen, we place not after the verb to be.
And we can also use it in the contracted form. Check this out:

< voltar para o índice


15
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PRESENT – TO BE
Negative Form

I am not / I’m not It is not / It’s not / It isn’t


Eu não sou/estou Ele/Ela/Isso não é/está

You are not / You’re not / You aren’t We are not / We’re not / We aren’t
Tu não és/estás; Você não é/está Nós não somos/estamos

He is not / He’s not / He isn’t You are not / You’re not / You aren’t
Ele não é/está Vós não sois/estais; Vocês não são/estão

She is not / She’s not / She isn’t They are not / They’re not / They aren’t
Ela não é/está Eles/Elas não são/estão

In this case, there are two possible contractions: one between the subject and the verb to be,
and the other one between the verb to be and the particle not. Notice that the first person
singular is an exception: I’m not is the only contraction that is considered grammatically correct.
Now look at what happens in the interrogative form:

SIMPLE PRESENT – TO BE
Interrogative Form

Am I…? Is it...?
Eu sou/estou...? Ele/Ela/Isso é/está...?

Are you...? Are we...?


Tu és/estás...?; Você é/está...? Nós somos/estamos...?

Is he...? Are you...?


Ele é/está...? Vós sois/estais...?; Vocês são/estão...?

Is she...? Are they...?


Ela é/está...? Eles/Elas são/estão...?

As you can see, we just invert the verb to be and the subject to form the interrogative form. Keep in mind that
these conjugations are references to use the verb to be in the present with a subject pronoun. Sometimes,
the subject is not a pronoun, but a noun. In this case, we will think of which subject pronoun is equivalent to
that noun to know the correct conjugation.

< voltar para o índice


16
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Let’s see this with some sentences. Check out this example:

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS + TO BE

The fitting room is upstairs.


O provador é/fica no andar de cima.

It is upstairs.
Ele é/fica no andar de cima.

The subject is the fitting room, which is a place in the singular, and the
corresponding subject pronoun is it. The conjugation of the verb to be for this
person is is, so: The fitting room is.
Let’s see another one:

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS + TO BE

The home appliances are on aisle number 10.


Os eletrodomésticos estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

They are on aisle number 10.


Eles estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

The subject is the home appliances, in the plural. That’s why we use the subject
pronoun they to replace it. The corresponding conjugation is are. Thus: The
home appliances are.
In these examples, we used the verb to be to talk about location. But if you don’t
have that information, you can just ask a question using where. To do that, use
the interrogative form. It will be like this:

WHERE + INTERROGATIVE FORM

Where is the fitting room?


Onde é/fica o provador?

< voltar para o índice


17
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

We start the sentence with where, then we use the interrogative


form of the verb to be, that is, verb + subject. In this case, the verb
is is, and the subject is fitting room.
To answer that question, we could say:

Upstairs. / It’s upstairs.


No andar de cima. / Ele é/fica no andar de cima.

Notice that the answer is the location: upstairs. The complete answer may have
the verb and the subject pronoun: It’s upstairs.
Let’s see one more example:

WHERE + INTERROGATIVE FORM

Where are the home appliances?


Onde estão/ficam os eletrodomésticos?

On aisle number 10. / They are on aisle number 10.


No corredor número 10. / Eles estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

Again, to ask the question, we start with where, then add the verb and the subject. The answer
will show the location: on aisle number 10.
And since home appliances is in the plural, to use a subject pronoun and the verb, the complete
answer would be: They are on aisle number 10.
In these examples, the verb to be is the main verb, the verb that has the main idea we want to
convey. But there are some situations in which the verb to be works as an auxiliary verb. It will be
in the sentence just to help build the verb form, without carrying the main idea of the sentence.
That is the case of the present continuous, for example. This verb form is used to express an
action in progress at the moment of speaking. Since it is an action, the meaning of the sentence
is carried by other verbs, and the verb to be will only be an auxiliary verb.
Let’s take a look at an example:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

I am looking for the electronics section.


Eu estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos.

< voltar para o índice


18
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this sentence, the main verb is to look for. Notice that the verb has a suffix, -ING, so it
becomes looking. The suffix -ING conveys the idea of continuity to the verb. And the verb
to be just helps compose this verb form. Since it is an action in progress at the moment of
speaking, the verb to be is conjugated in the present: I am.
The basic structure of the present continuous is quite simple. Have a look:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Affirmative Form

Subject + Verb To Be + Main Verb In The -ING Form + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento

The conjugation of the verb to be will change depending on the


subject. Check out this example:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Affirmative Form

The customer is browsing around the store.


O cliente está dando uma olhada na loja.

The customer is the subject, immediately followed by the verb to be conjugated in the
third person singular, is; then we have the main verb browse in the -ING form, and the
complement, around the store.
Now, look at the negative form:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Negative Form

Subject + Verb To Be + Not + Main Verb In The -ING Form + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Not + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


19
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

So, we just add not after the verb To Be. For example:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Negative Form

The customer is not (isn’t) browsing around the store.


O cliente não está dando uma olhada na loja.

Notice that the contracted form will be quite common in spoken English.
Finally, take a look at the interrogative form:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Interrogative Form

Verb To Be + Subject + Main Verb In The -ING Form + Complement


Verbo To Be + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento

In the interrogative, we just invert the position of the verb to be and the subject. For example:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Interrogative Form

Is the customer browsing around the store?


O cliente está dando uma olhada na loja?

In this chapter, we talked about the simple present of the verb to be, the
present continuous, the subject pronouns, and the question word where.
If you want to learn more about these topics, take a look at the Grammar
Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Present Continuous Page 251 w


Question Word Where Page 270 w
Simple Present – Verb To Be Page 316 w
Spelling Rules – -ING form Page 320 w
Subject Pronouns Page 323 w

< voltar para o índice


20
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Write ( 1 ) if the verb to be is the main verb of the sentence, and ( 2 ) if it’s an auxiliary verb.

a) The electronics are on the third floor. ( )


Os eletrônicos estão/ficam no terceiro andar.

b) The fitting room is upstairs. ( )


O provador é/fica no andar de cima.

c) The customer is browsing around the store. ( )


O cliente está dando uma olhada na loja.

d) They are on aisle number 10. ( )


Eles estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

e) Where are the home appliances? ( )


Onde estão/ficam os eletrodomésticos?

f) I am looking for the electronics section. ( )


Eu estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos.

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

a) The fitting room upstairs.


O provador é/fica no andar de cima.

b) are on aisle number 10.


Eles estão/ficam no corredor número 10.

c) are the home appliances?


Onde estão/ficam os eletrodomésticos?

d) for the electronics section.


Eu estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos

< voltar para o índice


21
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

e) The customer around the store.


O cliente não está dando uma olhada na loja.

f) The electronics on the third floor.


Os eletrônicos estão/ficam no terceiro andar.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


a. 1 d. 1 a. is d. I am (I’m) looking
b. 1 e. 1 b. They e. is not (isn’t) browsing
c. 2 f. 2 c. Where f. are

< voltar para o índice


22
Return Policy.
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you are going to learn how to exchange or return a product and
what to say in such situations. Besides that, you will also see some language
items to help you improve your language skills.
Now look at the script of Return Policy.

RE TURN POLICY

[Amy and Lucas are at a store, close to the customer service area]
Lucas:
So, as we said before, the U.S. really is a shopper’s paradise! So you
might as well just go crazy!

Amy:
Well...until you get home, get a grip on yourself and start to regret how
much you bought! There’s actually an American term for this: it’s called
“buyer’s remorse”!

Lucas:
Or maybe you go home, and you realize that what you bought isn’t
working properly. Or maybe the clothes that you got aren’t fitting as well
as you thought they would. Whatever your reason, return policies in the
U.S. are actually pretty simple. Generally, there’s a 30-day return policy,
but, ultimately, it’s at the store’s discretion.

Amy:
So, most American retailers do have pretty lenient return policies, and
they’re often described on the bottom of your receipt, or the back of
you receipt. They’re so focused on customer service and making the
customers happy, that they’re going to be pretty accommodating about
your needs.

Lucas:
Yeah, in fact, most international visitors are really surprised with how
easy it is to return goods in the United States. I mean, most stores are
not even going to ask you any questions, except for: “Why are you
returning this product?”

< voltar para o índice


24
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Well, they’re not asking you to determine whether or not they’ll take it
back; they’re just asking because they want to know if it’s ready to be
put back on the shelf or if there’s something wrong with it.

Lucas:
Now, here is a piece of advice, and it’s very important: keep your receipt!
Now, just because you don’t have your receipt, it doesn’t necessarily
mean that the store isn’t going to accept your return.

Amy:
Yes, that’s right! They’ll probably still process the return, but they might
give you store credit, say, instead of cashback.

Lucas:
Right; and because it’s relatively easy to do returns in the United States,
some people have been, well...taking advantage of the system, or
abusing the system. And by “abusing the system”, what I mean is, for
example: let’s say somebody has a wedding to go to on Sunday; well,
they buy something, wear it to that wedding on Sunday, and then, on
Monday, they return it to the store to get a refund.

Amy:
Well, that’s why some stores have had to implement some restrictions.
So they want to make sure that you’re returning the item because you
regret the purchase or something’s not working properly with it.

[Interviewing a customer service representative]


Amy:
So, we’re here with Loryann, who is a customer service rep here at the
store, and we’re going to talk to her about the store return policy.

Lucas:
Yes, so what’s the general return policy that you have here?

Loryann:
The general return policy is: anything without a receipt for 30 days, you
can get store credit.

Lucas:
Got it!

< voltar para o índice


25
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Loryann:
And also, with the return, if they return something and don’t have the
receipt, we can look it up under their credit card. They swipe their credit
card and we can look it up and it’ll come up on the screen when they
purchased it, here at this store, or at all.

Lucas:
Oh, wow!

Amy:
Does it have to be returned at the same location?

Loryann:
No, absolutely not.

Lucas:
Is there a difference when it’s from a different department? For instance:
electronics.

Loryann:
Electronics, some of the items, you have 15 days. TVs and computers,
you have 90 days, but anything else is 15 days!

Lucas:
Something from the electronics department that’s been opened, does
that change the return policy?

Loryann:
Yes, it does. Without a receipt, you won’t be able to exchange it. If it’s
opened and you have a receipt, you can exchange it for the same item!

Lucas:
Great! So there are a lot of differences in terms of departments. It’s
important to really know what the different policies are in terms of
returns and exchanges, and to always, always, always keep your receipt.
Alright, thank you!

Loryann
You’re welcome!

< voltar para o índice


26
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

POLÍTICA DE DE VOLUÇÃO

[Amy e Lucas estão numa loja, perto da área de atendimento ao


cliente]
Lucas:
Como já mencionamos, os EUA realmente são o paraíso para quem
curte compras! Então, o melhor é aproveitar!

Amy:
Bem... até você voltar pra casa, pensar melhor e começar a se
arrepender do tanto que comprou. Temos até um termo nos EUA para
isso: chama-se “remorso de comprador”!

Lucas:
Ou talvez você tenha chegado em casa e notado que algo não está
funcionando direito, ou que as roupas que você comprou não serviram
tão bem assim. Qualquer que seja o seu motivo, as políticas de
devolução nos EUA são bem simples. Geralmente, a política é que a
devolução pode ser feita em até 30 dias, mas, no final das contas, isso
fica a critério da loja.

Amy:
A maioria das lojas americanas tem políticas de devolução bem
permissíveis, que geralmente são descritas na parte inferior ou no verso
da sua nota fiscal. Elas são tão centradas em atender e satisfazer o
cliente, que vão tentar resolver seus problemas e necessidades.

Lucas:
Sim, na verdade a maioria dos turistas internacionais ficam surpresos
com a facilidade de se fazer uma devolução nos Estados Unidos. A
maioria das lojas nem vai fazer muitas perguntas, exceto, talvez, para
saber o motivo da devolução.

Amy:
Eles não vão perguntar isso para decidir se aceitam ou não a devolução,
mas somente para saber se o produto pode ser colocado novamente à
venda na prateleira ou se há algo de errado com ele.

Lucas:
Aqui vai um conselho muito importante: guarde sua nota fiscal! Mas, se
você não a tiver mais, isso não quer dizer necessariamente que a loja
não vai aceitar a devolução.

< voltar para o índice


27
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Isso mesmo! Eles provavelmente ainda vão processar a devolução, mas
você talvez receba crédito na loja, em vez do dinheiro de volta.

Lucas:
Exato; e como é relativamente fácil fazer devoluções nos Estados
Unidos, algumas pessoas têm se aproveitado ou abusado do sistema. O
que quero dizer com isso é, por exemplo: se alguém tem um casamento
para ir no domingo, compra algo para usar no dia, para, então, na
segunda, devolver o artigo na loja e pegar o reembolso.

Amy:
É por isso que algumas lojas implementaram algumas restrições. Elas
querem ter certeza de que você está devolvendo o artigo por ter se
arrependido da compra ou por haver algo de “errado” com ele.

[Entrevistando uma representante do atendimento ao cliente]


Amy:
Estamos aqui com a Loryann, que trabalha com atendimento ao
cliente aqui na loja, e vamos conversar com ela sobre sua política de
devoluções.

Lucas:
Qual é a política geral para devoluções que vocês têm aqui?

Loryann:
A política geral é aceitar devoluções em até 30 dias, com a nota fiscal.
Qualquer coisa após isso, e sem a nota, a pessoa ganha crédito na loja.

Lucas:
Entendi!

Loryann:
E com a devolução, se alguém trouxer algo sem a nota, podemos
procurá-la pelo cartão de crédito. Eles passam o cartão, e podemos
procurar e achar quando a compra foi feita, se foi feita na loja, ou se ela
sequer foi feita.

Lucas:
Caramba!

Amy:
A devolução precisa ser feita na mesma loja?

< voltar para o índice


28
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Loryann:
Não, de forma alguma.

Lucas:
Existe alguma diferença se a compra for de outro departamento... Por
exemplo: eletrônicos?

Loryann:
Para alguns artigos eletrônicos, o prazo é de 15 dias. Para TVs e
computadores, o prazo é de 90 dias, mas, para qualquer outro artigo,
são 15 dias!

Lucas:
Caso algum eletrônico tenha sido aberto, isso pode interferir na sua
devolução?

Loryann:
Sim, pode! Sem a nota fiscal, não será possível fazer a troca. Caso esteja
aberto e você tenha a nota, você pode trocá-lo pelo mesmo artigo.

Lucas:
Ótimo! Há muitas diferenças entre os departamentos; logo, é importante
que você conheça as diferentes políticas para trocas e devoluções, e
sempre, sempre, sempre guarde a nota fiscal! OK, obrigado!

Loryann:
De nada!

< voltar para o índice


29
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Return and refund policies in the U.S. are usually thought and adjusted to make
the client happy. Let’s see some common policies:

You can exchange the product for the same item.


Você pode trocar o produto por outro igual.

You can exchange the product for a different item.


Você pode trocar o produto por um artigo diferente.

You can return the product.


Você pode devolver o produto.

You get a refund or cashback.


Você recebe um reembolso ou o dinheiro de volta.

You get store credit.


Você recebe crédito na loja.

But those are possibilities, not rules. Each store has its own policy, and they are
usually found at the bottom or on the back of the receipt or on the store website.

If you are not happy with a product, look for a customer service representative
at the store and say:

I’d like to return this product, please.


Eu gostaria de devolver este produto, por favor.

And they will probably ask:

Why are you returning it?


Por que você o está devolvendo?

< voltar para o índice


30
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

They want to know if the product needs repairing or if it can go straight back to
the shelf. So here is what you can answer:

Because I regret the purchase.


Porque eu me arrependi da compra.

Because it didn’t meet my expectations.


Porque ele não atendeu às minhas expectativas.

Because I didn’t adapt to it.


Porque eu não me adaptei a ele.

Note that all the answers start with because. That is how we
answer a question with why.

If you just want to get another product, then you need to use the
verb to exchange. Check it out:

I’d like to exchange this product, please.


Eu gostaria de trocar este produto, por favor.

And they will still probably want to know your reasons for that by asking:

Why do you wish to exchange it?


Por que você deseja trocá-lo?

What’s wrong with it?


O que tem/há de errado com ele?

Then you will have to explain the problem. You can do that by saying:

Because it didn’t fit me. It’s not working properly.


Porque não me serviu. Não está funcionando direito.

< voltar para o índice


31
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

For faulty products, check if they have warranty. In this document, you can find
the coverage policies and warranty extension.

But, warranty or not, the store needs to confirm you have recently bought the
product there. So, they may ask:

Did you bring the receipt?


Você trouxe a nota fiscal?

If you don’t have the receipt, they will probably ask you:

When did you buy it?


Quando você o comprou?

In this case, you may answer:

Yesterday. / Last week. / Three days ago.


Ontem. / Semana passada. / Há três dias.

In most cases, if you are returning it within 30 days since


the purchase, they will conclude the transaction. Or they
may ask you how you paid for that:

Did you buy it with your credit card?


Você o comprou com cartão de crédito?

< voltar para o índice


32
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

They do so because they can swipe your credit card and find your
purchase in the system, and then confirm the information. But if
you used a different payment method, not having the receipt cuts
down your options:

You may not get cashback.


É possível que você não receba o seu dinheiro de volta.

You may have to exchange it only for the same product.


É possível que você só possa trocar o produto por outro igual.

So, remember to:

Always keep the receipt.


Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.

Keep the warranty too.


Guarde a garantia também.

Now you know what to do if you need to return or


exchange a product.

< voltar para o índice


33
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) To exchange a product ( ) Dinheiro de volta

( 2 ) To return a product ( ) Cartão de crédito

( 3 ) Cashback ( ) Compra

( 4 )S
 tore credit ( )D
 evolver um produto

( 5 ) Purchase ( ) Expectativas

( 6 ) Receipt ( ) Produto

( 7 ) Warranty ( ) Arrepender-se

( 8 ) Expectations ( ) Crédito na loja

( 9 ) To fit ( ) Trocar um produto

( 10 ) Product ( ) Garantia

( 11 ) Credit card ( ) Nota fiscal

( 12 ) T
 o regret ( )S
 ervir

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) are you returning it? d) You can the product for the
Por que você o está devolvendo? same item.
Você pode trocar o produto por outro igual.
b) Because I the purchase.
Porque eu me arrependi da compra. e) You get a refund or .
Você recebe um reembolso ou o dinheiro de
volta.
c) It’s not properly.
Não está funcionando direito.
f) Always keep the .
Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


3 / 11 / 5 / 2 / 8 / 10 / a. Why d. exchange
12 / 4 / 1 / 7 / 6 / 9 b. regret e. cashback
c. working f. receipt

< voltar para o índice


34
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we will talk about the simple present of other verbs, adverbs of
frequency, and the question words how, when, and why.

Let’s start by reviewing the basic structure for affirmative sentences:

BASIC SENTENCE STRUCTURE

Affirmative Form

Subject + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

This is the basic structure used for the simple present. It is the verb form we use to
talk about facts, routine, and habits.

Even though the basic structure of the sentence remains the same, the verb
conjugation will change a bit.

As we have seen, the conjugation of the verb to be is the most irregular one. However,
when we conjugate other verbs in the simple present, there will be differences only for
the third person singular.

Let’s take the verb to vary, for example:

TO VARY
Variar

I vary We vary
You vary You vary
He/She/It varies They vary

< voltar para o índice


35
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Note that the conjugation doesn’t change with the pronouns I, you, we, and they.
But the verb conjugation for the third person singular (the pronouns he, she, and
it) will be varies, changing the -Y for the suffix -IES.

Now, let’s analyze the verb to get:

TO GE T
Receber; Pegar

I get We get
You get You get
He/She/It gets They get

Once again, the conjugation only changes in the third person singular. In this
case, we only add -s to the verb, so it becomes gets.

Now, let’s see some examples in the simple present:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Affirmative Form

Return policies vary among stores.


As políticas de devolução variam entre as lojas.

Here, the subject is return policies, which is third person plural, equivalent to
the pronoun they. The main verb is vary. When we conjugate it, there are no
changes: the verb is in its base form.

Now, look at an example in the third person singular:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Affirmative Form

The customer gets a refund within 10 days.


O cliente recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.

< voltar para o índice


36
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now, the subject is the customer. If we replace it with a subject pronoun, we will use he or she.
Then the subject is equivalent to the third person singular. So, we add -s to the main verb: gets.

Let’s see what happens in the negative form now. Take a look at the general structure:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Negative Form

Subject + Auxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar Do + Not (Don’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Notice that with all the verbs in the simple present, except for the verb to be, we will use the
auxiliary verb do.

It is important to realize that the auxiliary verb do does not add any meaning to the sentence,
since it doesn’t actually have any meaning. It is just a tool to make the negative form.

Let’s turn the examples in the affirmative form to negative sentences to observe the difference:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Negative Form

Return policies do not (don’t) vary among stores.


As políticas de devolução não variam entre as lojas.

To make the sentence negative, we use the auxiliary verb do + not before the
main verb, which is kept in its base form. We can also use the contracted form
don’t.

Now, pay close attention to this example in the third person singular:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Negative Form

The customer does not (doesn’t) get a refund within 10 days.


O cliente não recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.

< voltar para o índice


37
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this case, the auxiliary verb will be conjugated, so it becomes does + not or, in
its contracted form, doesn’t. The main verb will remain in the base form. That is,
there is no suffix added to the verb here.

To make the interrogative form of the simple present, the auxiliary verb, not the
main verb, goes before the subject. Let’s see the general structure:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Interrogative Form

Auxiliary Verb Do + Subject + Main Verb + Complement


Verbo Auxiliar Do + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Have a look at the example:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Interrogative Form

Do return policies vary among stores?


As políticas de devolução variam entre as lojas?

So, we place the auxiliary verb in the beginning; then, we add the subject and
the main verb.

When the subject is he, she, or it, we will follow the same logic by using the
auxiliary verb does and the main verb in the base form. For example:

SIMPLE PRESENT

Interrogative Form

Does the customer get a refund within 10 days?


O cliente recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias?

< voltar para o índice


38
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Since the simple present is used to refer to habits and routines, adverbs of frequency are
commonly used with this verb form.

Take a look at some of them:

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY

Never Rarely Sometimes


Nunca Raramente Às vezes

Often
Always Usually
Frequentemente / Com
Sempre Geralmente
frequência / Muitas vezes

Adverbs of frequency express how often something happens. Take a


look at some examples:

SIMPLE PRESENT AND ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY

American stores usually accept returns and exchanges.


Lojas americanas geralmente aceitam devoluções e trocas.

Note that this sentence is in the simple present, and that the position of the
adverb of frequency usually is right before the main verb accept. That happens
with every other verb except the verb to be. Take a look:

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY AND SIMPLE PRESENT

Return policies are often at the end of the receipt.


Muitas vezes, as políticas de devolução estão no final da nota fiscal.

In this sentence, the main verb is to be: are. Notice that the adverb of frequency comes after it.
We can use adverbs of frequency with other verb forms too. Check it out:

< voltar para o índice


39
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY AND IMPERATIVE FORM

Always keep the receipt.


Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.

This sentence is in the imperative form, so the subject is omitted. In this case,
the position of the adverb of frequency is before the main verb.

If we want to ask a question about frequency, we will have to use a variation of


the question word how, which is How often. Look at this example:

HOW OF TEN + INTERROGATIVE FORM

How often do you go shopping?


Com que frequência você faz compras?

Pay attention to the structure: we start with How often, then we use the
interrogative form of the sentence. In this example, we are using the
interrogative form of the simple present: do you go shopping.

Now, it is important not to confuse how often with when. How often is a
question word used to ask about how frequently something happens, and
when is used to ask a question about the specific moment in which something
happens. Check this out:

HOW OF TEN
Frequency

How often do you go to the mall?


Com que frequência você vai ao shopping center?

Every weekend. / Once a month. / On Fridays.


Todo final de semana. / Uma vez por mês. / Às sextas.

Here, we are referring to the frequency with which you go to the mall, so the
possible answers will also indicate the frequency.

Now, compare with an example with the question word when:

< voltar para o índice


40
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

WHEN
Specific moment

When are you going to the mall?


Quando você vai ao shopping center?

Later. / Tomorrow. / Next week.


Mais tarde. / Amanhã. / Semana que vem.

Now the question refers to the specific moment when something will happen;
that’s why the possible answers will indicate a date.
Why is another important question word. It is used to ask about the reason
for something to happen. And the answer to a question with why starts with
because. Let’s see some examples:

WHY AND BE CAUSE


Reason

Why are you returning this product?


Por que você está devolvendo este produto?

Because I regret the purchase.


Porque eu me arrependi da compra.

Here, they want to know the reason behind your decision to return the product.
And, to ask this question, we’ll start with why and add the interrogative form. In
this case, the interrogative form of the present continuous. Notice that we use
why in the question and because in the answer.
Now, let’s see an example in the simple present:

WHY AND BE CAUSE


Reason

Why do you wish to exchange this product?


Por que você deseja trocar este produto?

Because it’s not working properly.


Porque não está funcionando direito.

Once again, we are using Why + the interrogative form to ask the question.
As for the answer, we start it with Because.

< voltar para o índice


41
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now you know how to use the simple present, talk about frequency,
and ask questions using the question words how often, when, and
why. For more details about these topics, take a look at the Grammar
Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Adverbs of Frequency Page 189 w


Question Word How Page 254 w
Question Word When Page 267 w
Question Word Why Page 284 w
Simple Present – Other Verbs Page 310 w

< voltar para o índice


42
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Choose the correct option to complete the sentence according to the translation.

a) American stores accept returns and exchanges.


Lojas americanas geralmente aceitam devoluções e trocas.

( ) usually
( ) never

b) are you going to the mall?


Quando você vai ao shopping center?

( ) When
( ) How often

c) Return policies are at the end of the receipt.


Muitas vezes, as políticas de devolução estão no final da nota fiscal.

( ) often
( ) sometimes

d) do you go to the mall?


Com que frequência você vai ao shopping center?

( ) When
( ) How often

e) keep the receipt.


Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.

( ) Never
( ) Always

< voltar para o índice


43
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

f) do you wish to exchange this product?


Por que você deseja trocar este produto?

( ) Because

f. do you wish / do you want


( ) Why

e. do you go
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

d. accept
a) Return policies among stores.

c. does not (doesn’t) get / receive


As políticas de devolução variam entre as lojas.

b) The customer a refund within 10 days.

Activity B – Answers
O cliente recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.

b. gets/receives
c) The customer a refund within 10 days.

a. vary
O cliente não recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.

d) American stores usually returns and exchanges.

d. How often
e. Always
Lojas americanas geralmente aceitam devoluções e trocas.

Activity A – Answers

f. Why
e) How often to the mall?

a. usually
b. When
Com que frequência você vai ao shopping center?

f) Why to exchange this product? c. often


Por que você deseja trocar este produto?

< voltar para o índice


44
Shopping
for Clothes.
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In the United States, you can buy clothes not only at specialty stores, but also at
supermarkets, convenience stores, and even drugstores. In this chapter, we will
show you some vocabulary that is very useful in this situation. You will also learn
some language items that will help you improve your English skills.
Now look at the script of Shopping for Clothes.

SHOPPING FOR CLOTHES

[At a store]
Amy:
So, you want to go shopping for clothes. In the U.S., there are so many
options and so many different price points that you can shop at! You can
find clothes everywhere, from gas stations to big chain stores like this
one! Stores like this will sell groceries, clothing, even furniture, and pet
supplies, or car parts! You won’t find designer clothes here, but you will
find quality T-shirts, pants, scarves, and swimsuits for as low as US$5!

[On a street downtown]


Lucas:
And, of course, as one would expect, clothes are sold in good clothing
stores, but also in malls! The advantage of going to a mall, of course, is
that they’re very accessible, as they’re often located in tourist places.
Clothing stores in malls sell a variety of brands, and they always have
the latest collections.

Amy:
So, if you are here to shop, but you’re looking for designer items at
a low, low price, you’ll have to look up outlet malls, which are one of
my favorite places in the world! Outlet malls are a collection of outlet
stores that sell designer and name-brand items at a discount, but the
only downside is they are usually about a 50-minute drive from any
metropolitan center. So, depending on what cities you’re traveling to,
you can start researching what outlet malls are around, how to get
there, and often times they have email lists that you can sign up for, and
they will send you coupons for up to 50% off your final purchase price.
That’s 50% off on already discounted prices! What can beat that?

< voltar para o índice


46
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Lucas:
Now, if real cheap is what you’re looking for, then there’s still some other
options for you! And I mean cheap! Cheaper than the outlet stores! In
some stores, they specialize in selling collection leftovers. And the good
news is that these stores are located all over town, even in tourist spots!
So, I recommend that you go to these stores! And take your time looking
through them, because, at first glance, you know, you might notice that
they might not have as big of a selection, or they might be a little bit
messy, but trust me! Take your time, look through that stuff, because I
guarantee that you’re going to find something that’s exactly what you’re
looking for!

[On Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
But if you’re looking for the latest collections at high-end designer
stores, this is your place! Rodeo Drive!

[Interviewing a clothes salesperson]


Amy:
Hi! We’re here with Angela, and she’s going to talk to us a little bit about
shopping in America. Specifically, clothing shopping! What are some
places that you can go, from low-end to high-end?

Angela:
Well, there’s the whole Rodeo Drive area, where it’s much high-end
stuff. And then there are consignment stores and thrift stores, which are
clothes that are being resold. And then there’s in the middle, which is
right in middle of both of those, which is brand-new clothes that aren’t
previously worn, but they’re not high-end brands.

Amy:
Can you explain what consignment stores are, just in case our viewers
don’t know them?

Angela:
Totally! A consignment store is a store that is reselling clothes that
were previously worn, like a used bookstore. But they usually shouldn’t
be dirty. They’re usually clean, good clothes; sometimes even brand
clothing is sold at these consignment stores, but probably for a third of
the price you would get for them on the real rack.

Amy:
There are other options too. Like, outlets, right?

< voltar para o índice


47
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Angela:
Yes, there are outlets that are brands that are doing half-sale options,
and those are all over! Probably even more than the high-end stores are
the outlets.

Amy:
If you had one word of advice about shopping for clothes in the U.S. for
our viewers, what would you say?

Angela:
It would be never buying at the retail price! You can always find better!

Amy:
Same! Yes, thank you!

Angela:
You’re welcome!

COMPRANDO ROUPAS

[Em uma loja]


Amy:
Então, você quer comprar roupas. Nos EUA, há muitas opções e faixas
de preço para você fazer compras! Você pode achar roupas em qualquer
lugar, desde o posto de gasolina, até grandes cadeias de lojas como
esta! Lojas como esta vendem alimentos, roupas, móveis, artigos para
animais de estimação e até mesmo peças de carro! Você não vai achar
roupas de grife aqui, mas vai conseguir achar camisetas de qualidade,
calças, cachecóis e trajes de banho por preços a partir de US$5!

[Em uma rua no centro da cidade]


Lucas:
Como você pode imaginar, roupas também são vendidas em lojas
especializadas, assim como em shoppings! A vantagem de ir a um
shopping é que eles são muito acessíveis e geralmente ficam próximos
a pontos turísticos. Lojas de roupas em shoppings vendem várias
marcas e sempre terão as coleções mais recentes.

< voltar para o índice


48
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Mas se você está aqui para fazer compras e procura artigos de grife com
preços muito, muito baixos, você terá que encontrar um outlet, que é
um dos meus lugares preferidos no mundo! Shoppings de outlets são
um conjunto de lojas de outlet que vendem artigos de grifes e marcas
famosas com descontos. O único ponto negativo é que eles geralmente
ficam a 50 minutos de carro de qualquer centro metropolitano. Logo,
dependendo da cidade onde estiver, você pode pesquisar quais outlets
se encontram nas redondezas, como chegar lá, e muitas vezes eles têm
listas de e-mail em que você pode se cadastrar para receber cupons de
até 50% de desconto no preço final! São 50% de desconto sobre os
preços que já estavam com desconto! O que pode ser melhor do que
isso?

Lucas:
Agora, se é algo realmente barato o que você procura, então ainda
temos outras opções para você! E estou falando de barato mesmo! Mais
barato do que os outlets! Algumas lojas são especializadas em vender
sobras de coleções. E a notícia boa é que essas lojas são encontradas
por toda a cidade, inclusive em pontos turísticos. Por isso eu recomendo
que você vá! E vasculhe essas lojas sem pressa, porque, à primeira vista,
você pode notar que elas não têm tanta variedade ou podem ser um
pouco bagunçadas, mas confie em mim! Dê uma olhada nas peças com
calma, porque eu garanto que você vai encontrar exatamente o que
procura!

[Na Rodeo Drive]


Amy:
Mas se você está à procura das últimas coleções e roupas de grife da
melhor qualidade, aqui é o seu lugar! Rodeo Drive!

[Entrevistando uma vendedora de roupas]


Amy:
Oi! Estamos aqui com a Angela, que vai conversar um pouco com a
gente sobre fazer compras nos Estados Unidos e, mais especificamente,
sobre comprar roupas! A quais lugares se pode ir, desde o mais barato
até o mais caro?

Angela:
Há toda a região da Rodeo Drive, onde temos as coisas mais caras. E há
também as lojas de consignação e brechós, que trabalham com roupas
usadas. E temos o meio-termo entre essas opções, que são roupas
novas em folha, que nunca foram usadas, mas que não são de grife.

< voltar para o índice


49
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Você poderia explicar o que são lojas de consignação?

Angela:
Claro! Uma loja de consignação é uma loja que revende roupas que
já tenham sido usadas, tal qual um sebo. Mas elas geralmente estão
limpas! Geralmente são roupas boas e limpas. Às vezes, roupas de
marca podem ser vendidas nessas lojas, mas por um terço do preço que
você pagaria por elas nas araras originais.

Amy:
Temos outras opções também, como outlets, por exemplo?

Angela:
Sim, há outlets de marcas que vendem pela metade do preço, e eles
estão por toda parte! Provavelmente existem mais outlets do que lojas
de grife.

Amy:
Que conselho você daria para quem está nos assistindo e quer comprar
roupas nos Estados Unidos?

Angela:
Nunca pague o preço cheio! Você sempre pode achar um preço melhor!

Amy:
Exato! Obrigada!

Angela:
De nada!

< voltar para o índice


50
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

The shopping mall, or more commonly, just mall, is the name of the place we can go to buy
something. If you want to say that you are going there, you say:

I’m going to the mall. I’m going shopping at the mall.


Eu vou ao shopping. Eu vou fazer compras no shopping (center).

The word shopping is a verb, an action that you do; it’s not a
place. So you cannot say:

I’m going to the shopping.


Eu vou ao shopping.

If you are looking for women’s clothes, you will find:

WOMEN’S WARDROBE

Dress Skirt Miniskirt


Vestido Saia Minissaia

< voltar para o índice


51
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Long skirt Blouse T-shirt


Saia longa Blusa feminina Camiseta

A pair of jeans Nightgown Pants / A pair of pants


Um par de calças jeans Camisola Calças / Um par de calças

And here are some pieces of men’s wardrobe:

MEN’S WARDROBE

Polo shirt Suit Dress shirt Pajamas / PJs


Camisa polo Terno Camisa social Pijama

< voltar para o índice


52
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

As for underwear, here is what you may buy:

UNDERWEAR

Panties / A pair of panties Bra Briefs / A pair of briefs


Calcinha Sutiã Cueca slip

Boxer / Boxer shorts Boxer Briefs


Cueca samba-canção Cueca boxer

This vocabulary is also used for kids’ clothing.


If you need help to find what you want, you can ask the salesperson:

Excuse me. I’m looking for skirts. Excuse me. Do you have dresses?
Com licença. Eu estou procurando por saias. Com licença. Vocês têm vestidos?

Notice that both examples show situations in which you approach the salesperson, so it is
important to start with Excuse me.

Then, to ask for something, all you have to do is change the item for
the one you are looking for. For example:

I’m looking for skirts/dresses/pants.

< voltar para o índice


53
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The same applies for the other sentence construction:

Do you have dresses/skirts/pants?

If you go to a boutique or a fancy store, the salesperson will approach


you first, and they will probably say:

May I help you?


Posso te ajudar?

It is considered polite to accept their offer. If you do, the following


conversation is likely to take place:

May I help you? Yes, please.


Posso te ajudar? Sim, por favor.

Are you looking for anything in particular?


Você está procurando por alguma coisa em particular?

I’m looking for dresses.


Eu estou procurando por vestidos.

Or whichever other piece of clothing you want. Or you could choose


to say the sentence:

Do you have dresses?


Vocês têm vestidos?

Or whichever piece of clothing you wish.

< voltar para o índice


54
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The salesperson will probably ask questions about your style and
preferences to find pieces you will like. So they may ask:

What kind of fabric do you prefer?


Que tipo de tecido você prefere?

And you can answer:

I prefer denim/silk/cotton.
Eu prefiro jeans/seda/algodão.

They may also ask you about pattern:

What kind of pattern do you like?


De que tipo de estampa você gosta?

And you can tell them what your favorites are:

I prefer it solid/checkered/striped.
Eu prefiro lisa/xadrez/listrada.

Then they will probably get some pieces they think you will like.
Take a look at what they may say:

You should try this flowered silk skirt.


Você deveria experimentar essa saia florida de seda.

Why don’t you try this denim dress?


Por que você não experimenta esse vestido jeans?

Now you know specific vocabulary to go shopping for


clothes in the U.S. and the possible interactions you may
have with the salesperson.

< voltar para o índice


55
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Dress ( ) Camisa social

( 2 ) T-shirt ( ) Blusa feminina

( 3 ) Dress shirt ( ) Pijama

( 4 )W
 omen’s wardrobe ( ) Calças

( 5 ) Blouse ( ) Sutiã

( 6 ) Pants ( ) Calcinha

( 7 ) Suit ( ) Camiseta

( 8 ) Nightgown ( ) Roupa íntima

( 9 ) Underwear ( ) Camisola

( 10 ) Panties ( ) Vestido

( 11 ) Bra ( ) Vestuário feminino

( 12 ) P
 ajamas ( )T
 erno

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) Excuse me. I’m looking for . e) You should try this flowered
Com licença. Eu estou procurando por saias. skirt.
Você deveria experimentar essa saia florida
de seda.
b) Excuse me. Do you have ?
Com licença. Vocês têm vestidos?
f) Why don’t you try this
dress?
c) What kind of do you
Por que você não experimenta esse vestido
prefer?
jeans?
Que tipo de tecido você prefere?

d) What kind of do you like?


De que tipo de estampa você gosta? Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers
3 / 5 / 12 / 6 / 11 / 10 / a. skirts d. pattern
2/9/8/1/4/7 b. dresses e. silk
c. fabric f. denim

< voltar para o índice


56
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we are going to talk about the present continuous, the be going to structure, the
question word what, the modal verb should, and the contraction of verbs.
We already know that the present continuous is used to talk about situations in progress at the
present moment. But we can also use this verb form to talk about the future, be it in the form of
arrangements or plans. We can say, for example:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Future

I’m traveling to the United States next month to do some shopping.


Eu estou viajando para os Estados Unidos mês que vem para fazer umas compras.

In this sentence, the adverb of time next month shows that the situation is still
going to happen. In this context, this verb form does not express continuity, but
refers to a planned future action.
There is a third use for the present continuous that refers to an action that is going
to happen really soon. For instance:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Future

I’m going to the mall.


Eu estou indo ao shopping. / Eu vou ao shopping.

It is quite clear that you will be leaving for the mall in a few minutes. There is no
adverb of time to make it absolutely clear, but we can understand from the context
that we are talking about a future action.

< voltar para o índice


57
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Let’s see how to form the present continuous:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Affirmative Form

Subject + Auxiliary Verb (To Be) + Main Verb (In The -ING Form) + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar To Be + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento

Negative Form

Subject + Auxiliary Verb (To Be) + Not + Main Verb (In The -ING Form) + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar To Be + Not + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento

Interrogative Form

Auxiliary Verb (To Be) + Subject + Main Verb (In The -ING Form) + Complement
Verbo Auxiliar To Be + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento

Bear in mind that the verb to be in the present continuous works as an auxiliary
verb, and that it must be conjugated in the present. The suffix -ING will be
added to the main verb, not to the verb to be.
There is another structure we can use to talk about actions in the future. It is
sometimes confused with the present continuous—the structure be going to.
The confusion happens because the verb to go in this structure is used in the
-ING form, and it looks like the present continuous. But this combination is just
an auxiliary that follows the main verb. Let’s see some examples and compare:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

I’m going to the mall.


Eu estou indo ao shopping.

< voltar para o índice


58
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The subject here is I. The verb to be is am, even though it is contracted with the
subject. And the main verb is go in the -ING form. So, this sentence is in the
present continuous.
Now, look at this one:

BE GOING TO

I’m going to buy some clothes at the mall.


Eu estou indo comprar umas roupas no shopping.
Eu vou comprar umas roupas no shopping.

The main action is buy. The expression be going to, conjugated as am going to,
according to the subject I, shows that the action is future. The main verb of this
sentence is buy, which is in the base form.
We can also use be going to with go as the main verb. It may sound weird to
use the same verb twice in a sentence, but it is grammatically correct.
Check it out:

BE GOING TO

I’m going to go to the mall.


Eu estou indo ao shopping. / Eu vou ao shopping.

We used be going to and the main verb go. And there is another way to use it,
take a look:

BE GOING TO

I’m gonna go to the mall.


Eu estou indo ao shopping. / Eu vou ao shopping.

Gonna is the contraction of going to. It is quite common in spoken English.

< voltar para o índice


59
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Summing up, the structure of be going to is:

BE GOING TO

Affirmative Form

Subject + Be + Going To + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Be + Going to + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Negative Form

Subject + Be + Not + Going To + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Be + Not + Going to + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Interrogative Form

Be + Subject + Going To + Main Verb + Complement


Be + Sujeito + Going to + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Besides the differences in structure between the present continuous and be going
to, there is also a difference concerning the ideas they convey.

Be going to with the verb to be in the present can only be used to refer to the future.
That is a difference in comparison to the present continuous, because this verb
form is also used to talk about actions in progress in the present. Moreover, be going
to means that this future situation is an arrangement, something planned, not a
sudden decision. Check it out:

BE GOING TO
Plan

I’m going to travel to the U.S. to do some shopping.


Eu estou indo para os Estados Unidos fazer umas compras.

< voltar para o índice


60
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Be going to can also convey the idea of a prediction based on evidence. We use it to talk about something
we believe will happen because we see evidence of it. Imagine you’ve arranged to meet a friend to go
shopping together, but the weather is getting cloudy. So, you can ask your friend:

BE GOING TO
Prediction based on evidence

Do you still wanna go shopping today? I think it’s gonna rain cats and dogs. Look at the sky.
Você ainda quer ir ao shopping hoje? Acho que vai chover canivete. Olha o céu.

So, based on what we can see, the cloudy sky, we can predict it is going to rain really soon.
The cloudy sky is the evidence. And once again, we can see the contraction gonna in the
example.
Note that we used wanna, which is a very common contraction in English. Its full form is want
+ to. It expresses a desire to do something.
Here is another situation in which you may hear be going to being used to make a prediction:

BE GOING TO
Prediction based on evidence

I see you’re wearing a skirt. You’re gonna love our new skirt collection!
Vejo que você está usando saia. Você vai amar nossa nova coleção de saias!

Here, the salesperson sees you in a skirt and predicts that you are going to love their new skirt
collection. It is a prediction based on evidence.
They can also ask what you are planning to buy. Suppose you have tried on many skirts. The
salesperson can say:

BE GOING TO
Plan

All the skirts you tried on were perfect. Are you gonna take them all?
Todas as saias que você experimentou ficaram perfeitas. Você vai levar todas?

< voltar para o índice


61
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this case, be going to conveys the idea of a plan, something the person has
been thinking about doing.
As you can see, be going to can be easily heard in the context of shopping. And
the expression what kind of is quite common in this context as well. We use it to
ask the type of something.
For example, suppose you go to a store to buy a dress. There are a million dresses
there, so it is natural to hear this question from the salesperson. Take a look:

WHAT KIND OF

What kind of dress are you looking for: short, long…?


Que tipo de vestido você está procurando: curto, longo...?

In this sentence, the salesperson wants to know the type of dress you
are looking for.
When we ask a question using what kind of, we place the object we
are referring to right after it. In this case, dress: What kind of dress.
Then we add the interrogative form of the verb: are you looking for.
Another question people can ask you at a store is:

WHAT KIND OF

What kind of fabric do you prefer?


Que tipo de tecido você prefere?

Once again, we can see what kind of followed by the object we are referring to: fabric. And the
answer to this question would be a type of fabric: cotton, silk, denim, and so on.
If you are at a boutique, it is quite probable that the salesperson will try and give suggestions
on what you should take. The most common way to do it is by using the modal verb should.
Depending on the context, should may convey an idea of suggestion or recommendation. And
its structure follows the basic rules of the modal verbs, which are the following:

SHOULD
Affirmative Form

Subject + Should + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Should + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


62
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

For example:

SHOULD
Suggestion/Recommendation

You should try this flowered silk skirt.


Você deveria experimentar essa saia florida de seda.

In the affirmative form, we have the subject You, then should, and the main verb
try. That is a suggestion to try on the skirt.
Now, look at the structure in the negative form:

SHOULD
Negative Form

Subject + Should + Not (Shouldn’t) + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Should + Not (Shouldn’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento

For example:

SHOULD
Negative Form

You shouldn’t try this flowered silk skirt.


Você não deveria experimentar essa saia florida de seda.

The difference is that we place not right after should. As for the context, now
someone is suggesting to someone else that they should not do something.
Finally, the structure for the interrogative form:

SHOULD
Interrogative Form

Should + Subject + Main Verb + Complement


Should + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


63
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

For example:

SHOULD
Request for a suggestion

Should I try this flowered silk skirt?


Eu deveria experimentar essa saia florida de seda?

The situation is slightly different now, since it is a request for a suggestion.


It is common to ask for a recommendation for ourselves. But it is not so common
to ask for a recommendation for somebody else. So, the interrogative structure
is used especially with the first person singular I, or first person plural we.
And we could also use it to request a suggestion in general, for example:

SHOULD
Request for a suggestion

What should we do?


O que nós deveríamos fazer?

In this example, by using the question word what + interrogative form of should,
we indicate that we don’t know what to do at all, so we ask for a suggestion.

In this chapter, we talked about the present continuous, the


structure be going to, the question word what, the modal verb
should, and the contraction of verbs. If you want to learn more
about these topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide section at
the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Be Going To – Future Page 193 w


Contraction of Verbs Page 200 w
Modal Verb Should Page 226 w
Present Continuous Page 251 w
Question Word What Page 260 w

< voltar para o índice


64
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Choose the option that best explains the idea conveyed by the sentences.

a) I’m traveling to the United States next month d) Should I try this flowered silk skirt?
to do some shopping. Eu deveria experimentar essa saia florida de
Eu estou viajando para os Estados Unidos mês seda?
que vem para fazer umas compras.
( 1 ) giving suggestion
( 1 ) arrangement ( 2 ) asking for suggestion
( 2 ) action in progress

b) I’m going to buy some clothes at the mall. e) I see you’re wearing a skirt. You’re gonna love
Eu estou indo comprar umas roupas no our new skirt collection!
shopping. Vejo que você está usando saia. Você vai
amar nossa nova coleção de saias!
( 1 ) planned action
( 2 ) prediction ( 1 ) predicition
( 2 ) arrangement
c) I think it’s gonna rain cats and dogs. Look at
the sky.
Acho que vai chover canivete. Olha o céu.

( 1 ) arrangement
( 2 ) prediction

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

a) to the United States next month to do some shopping.


Eu estou viajando para os Estados Unidos mês que vem para fazer umas compras.

b) to the mall.
Eu estou indo ao shopping.

< voltar para o índice


65
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

c) some clothes at the mall.


Eu vou comprar umas roupas no shopping.

a. I am (I’m) traveling / I am (I’m) going to travel

c. I am (I’m) going to buy / I am (I’m) buying


b. I am (I’m) going / I am (I’m) going to go
d) I think cats and dogs. Look at the sky.
Acho que vai chover canivete. Olha o céu.

d. it is (it’s) going to rain


e) fabric do you prefer?

Activity B – Answers
Que tipo de tecido você prefere?

f. You should try


e. What kind of
f) this flowered silk skirt.
Você deveria experimentar essa saia florida de seda.

Activity A – Answers

d. 2
b. 1
a. 1

e. 1
c. 2

< voltar para o índice


66
Sizes and
Measures.
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you are going to learn about sizes and measures used in the U.S.,
which are quite different from the ones used in other countries. You will also learn
some language items to help you interact with the salesperson concerning this
matter.
Now look at the script of Sizes and Measures.

SIZES AND MEASURES

[At a store]
Lucas:
So, the measurement system in the U.S. is different than what it is in
other countries, because other countries use the metric system, but here
in the U.S., we don’t.

Amy:
For example, we measure height in feet. So, each foot measures to
about 30 centimeters. For example, if you were 1.9 meter tall, we would
say you were 6 foot 2.

Lucas:
And the same thing goes for weight. In the U.S. we measure weight in
pounds. So, if you are about 176 pounds, like me, that would mean that
you’re about 80 kilograms.

Amy:
American measurements are important to keep in mind if you’re
shopping for clothes, especially if they’re a gift for someone else!

Lucas:
And the measurement that we use for clothes is also pretty unique.
So, for example, you might notice that, on a tag, there are two different
numbers on the label. This one says 31-32.

Amy:
The first number is referring to waist size, and the second number is
referring to the inseam.

< voltar para o índice


68
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Interviewing a salesperson]
Amy:
Hey, guys! I’m here with Georgy, who works at one of the most famous
stores in America! He’s a sales associate, and we’re going to talk to him
about sizing today! So, when you have international visitors, what do
you do for them to make sure they’re getting the right size?

Georgy:
Well, the first thing that we do is: we try to get their size, so we show
them a chart of small, medium, large, or extra-large. And that chart has
the matrix of everything, from sizing from different countries as well. So,
we try to get their size so whenever they’re looking at a shirt that they
like, or button-up shirt or something, we try to give them two sizes, just
to see which one is fitting and which one works best for them.

Amy:
Two sizes to try on, you mean?

Georgy:
Correct.

Amy:
So, I know that denim sizing, too, we usually have it go by waist size
and inseam, so they are two measurements. Can you tell me more about
that? What’s the order?

Georgy:
For guys here in the U.S., we try to go for the waist and then the inseam
as well. The inseam starting close to the groin, all the way down to the
ankle. So, I am a 32 by 30. And it’s awesome, because I don’t have to
cut my jeans or anything like that! In other countries, you always go by
the waist, and 42 is the inseam. So, the inseam is always going to be 42
for other countries, because the individual buys the jeans and after they
buy the jeans, they’ll cut it themselves and tailor it.

Amy:
So, if I came to you and I knew my measurements... I know mine in
inches, not centimeters, like the rest of the world. I could ask you to look
at the chart to see what size I’d be for skirts, versus sweatpants, versus
slacks, versus denim, right?

< voltar para o índice


69
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Georgy:
Correct! A good sales associate already knows everything as soon as
he sees you, and he’s already evaluating, “that person is a medium", or
“that person’s skirt is a number 2”. So, you would definitely come to us,
and we could also show you the chart that we have, and the chart would
actually assist you in picking out what dress, or what shirt you need.

Amy:
Cool! And thank you so much! This has been very informative!

Georgy:
Thank you so much!

TAMANHOS E MEDIDAS

[Em uma loja]


Lucas:
O sistema de medidas nos EUA é diferente do que encontramos em
outros países, porque neles se usa o sistema métrico, e nos EUA, não.

Amy:
Por exemplo, medimos a altura em pés. Cada pé mede cerca de 30
centímetros. Ou seja, se você mede 1,90 metro, nós dizemos que você
tem 6’2’’ pés.

Lucas:
O mesmo vale para o peso. Nos EUA, usamos libras. Logo, se você pesa
176 libras como eu, isso significa que você pesa cerca de 80 quilos.

Amy:
É importante se lembrar das unidades americanas quando você compra
roupas, especialmente ao comprar um presente para alguém!

Lucas:
E as medidas que usamos para roupas também são peculiares! Por
exemplo, você pode notar em uma etiqueta que temos dois tamanhos
diferentes. Esta aqui diz que o tamanho é 31-32.

< voltar para o índice


70
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
O primeiro número está se referindo ao tamanho da cintura, e o
segundo, ao tamanho da perna.

[Entrevistando um vendedor]
Amy:
Oi pessoal! Estou aqui com o Georgy, que trabalha em uma das lojas
mais famosas dos EUA! Ele é assistente de vendas, e vamos conversar
sobre tamanhos de roupa! Quando você encontra turistas internacionais,
o que você faz para garantir que eles estejam comprando o tamanho
correto?

Georgy:
Bem, a primeira coisa a se fazer é saber que tamanho eles usam. Nós
mostramos uma tabela com os tamanhos P, M, G e GG. Essa tabela
tem praticamente a matriz de tudo, incluindo as medidas usadas em
outros países. Logo, tentamos descobrir o tamanho usado, se eles estão
olhando para uma camiseta que gostaram, uma camisa, ou algo do tipo,
só lhes damos dois tamanhos para ver qual deles veste melhor.

Amy:
Dois tamanhos para eles provarem?

Georgy:
Correto.

Amy:
Eu sei que, para calças jeans, nós normalmente usamos o tamanho da
cintura e o da perna; logo, são duas medidas. Você pode me falar mais
sobre isso? Qual é a ordem a seguir?

Georgy:
Para pessoas aqui dos Estados Unidos, sempre começamos pela cintura
e depois pelo comprimento da perna. Essa medida começa perto da
virilha e vai até o calcanhar. Por exemplo, eu uso tamanho 32 por 30. E é
muito bom, porque não tenho que fazer a bainha das minhas calças! Em
outros países, você sempre usa a medida da cintura, e o comprimento
da perna é 42. Logo, o comprimento da perna sempre será esse, porque
o cliente compra a calça para depois fazer a bainha.

Amy:
Então, se eu viesse falar com você e soubesse minhas medidas, e eu
sei as minhas em polegadas, e não em centímetros como no resto
do mundo, eu poderia pedir para olhar a sua tabela para saber meu
tamanho de saia, de calça de moletom, calça casual e jeans, correto?

< voltar para o índice


71
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Georgy:
Correto! Toda pessoa que trabalha bem com vendas já sabe disso, e
assim que ela te vê, já sabe que seu tamanho é M, ou que tal pessoa usa
saia tamanho 2. Então, você viria falar com a gente, nós mostraríamos
nossa tabela, e ela te ajudaria a escolher qual vestido ou camisa de que
você precisa.

Amy:
Legal! Muito obrigada! Foi muito informativo!

Georgy:
Muito obrigado!

< voltar para o índice


72
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

The whole measurement system is different in the U.S., for they use the United
States customary units. Most countries use the metric system. Compare:

UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

Weight Length
Peso Comprimento
1 pound
˜ 0,5 kilos 1 foot
˜ 30 cm
1 ounce 28 grams 1 inch 2.5 cm
˜ ˜

The salespeople are generally trained to know the customers’ sizes only by looking
at them. If you need any help finding the right size, you can say, for example:

Excuse me. Could you help me find the right size of pants?
Com licença. Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de calças?

Since we are talking about pants, we used size of pants. But if you want another piece of
clothing, just change pants for the item you want, such as dress or shirt. Let’s see:

Excuse me. Could you help me find the right size of dress?
Com licença. Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?

Excuse me. Could you help me find the right size of shirt?
Com licença. Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de camisa?

< voltar para o índice


73
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

As a response, the salesperson may ask you for whom that item is:

Are you buying it for yourself or someone else?


Você está comprando para você mesmo(a) ou para outra pessoa?

If it is for yourself, you can say: If it is for someone else, you say:

I’m buying it for myself. I’m buying it for someone else.


Estou comprando para mim mesmo(a). Estou comprando para outra pessoa.

And then you may describe the person or say the size they wear back home.

Some brands use sizes that can be recognized internationally. Here they are:

SIZES

Small (S)
Pequeno (P)

Medium (M)
Médio (M)

Large (L)
Grande (G)

Extra Large (XL)


Extragrande (GG)

And there is also extra small, or XS, and extra-extra large, XXL.

And here is how you can say your size:

I’m a small.
Eu uso tamanho pequeno.

< voltar para o índice


74
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that we use the verb to be, not the verb use, since it can’t be used to talk
about clothes. It is incorrect to say, “I use a small,” for example. For that, we can
use the verb wear. Check it out:

I use a small. I wear a small.


Eu uso tamanho pequeno. Eu visto tamanho pequeno.

And if the size you got is too small, ask the


salesperson for help. Just say:

This dress is too tight for me.


Esse vestido está muito apertado para mim.

In case it is the opposite, you say: And to ask for a different size, you can say:

These pants are too loose for me. Do you have it in another size?
Essas calças estão muito largas para mim. Você tem essa peça em outro tamanho?

To ask for an item in another color, you can say:

Can I have this in blue/black? Can I have these in blue/black?


Posso ver isso em azul/preto? Posso ver esses em azul/preto?

Now you know a bit about units of measurement in the United States
customary units and how to interact with the salespeople concerning
sizes and measurements of clothes in the U.S.

< voltar para o índice


75
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) 1 pound ( ) Apertado

( 2 ) 1 ounce ( ) Tamanho

( 3 ) 1 foot ( ) Largo

( 4 )1
 inch ( ) Calças

( 5 ) Size ( ) 1 pé

( 6 ) Large ( ) Médio

( 7 ) Small ( ) Vestido

( 8 ) Medium ( ) Pequeno

( 9 ) Tight ( ) 1 libra

( 10 ) Loose ( ) Grande

( 11 ) Pants ( ) 1 onça

( 12 ) D
 ress ( )1
 polegada

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.

a) I wear a . e) Are you buying it for or


Eu visto tamanho pequeno. someone else?
Você está comprando para você mesmo(a)
ou para outra pessoa?
b) This dress is too for me.
Esse vestido está muito apertado para mim.
f) Can I have this in ?
Posso ver isso em azul?
c) These pants are too for me.
Essas calças estão muito largas para mim.

d) Do you have it in another ?


Você tem essa peça em outro tamanho?
Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers
9/ 5 / 10 / 11 / 3 / 8 / a. small d. size
12 / 7 / 1 / 6 / 2 / 4 b. tight e. yourself
c. loose f. blue

< voltar para o índice


76
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we will talk about reflexive, subject, and object pronouns, as well
as the question word who.
Let’s start with subject pronouns. Look at the example:

Could you help me find the right size of dress?


Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?

Based on the context of shopping, we understand it is a customer asking a


salesperson for help. That’s why the subject pronoun is you, which is used to talk
directly to the person. Moreover, you represents the person that will perform the
action of helping the customer.
Let’s see another example:

Do you have it in another size?


Você tem isso em outro tamanho?

Again, it is a customer talking to a salesperson. We refer to the salesperson by using


you, since we are talking directly to him or her. When we analyze the verb, we notice
that you is the one that performs the action expressed by the main verb have.
The subject pronouns are:

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS

Singular Plural

I = eu we = nós
you = você you = vocês
he = ele they = eles/elas
she = ela
it = ele/ela; isso ( pronome neutro)

< voltar para o índice


77
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that we use you for the second person in both singular and plural forms.
It is important to highlight that the subject pronoun it cannot be used for people.
Let’s see one more example of the use of subject pronouns. If you want to talk
about the salesperson, you can say:

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS

The salesperson has many dresses to show.


O(A) vendedor(a) tem muitos vestidos para mostrar.

He/She has many dresses to show.


Ele/Ela tem muitos vestidos para mostrar.

Notice that here we are not talking directly to the salesperson anymore, but
about him or her. So, we can replace the word salesperson for the third person
subject pronoun he or she.
Now, take a look at this other sentence:

Could you help me find the right size of dress?


Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?

In this case, right after the verb help, there is the pronoun me. It refers to the
person who is asking the question. Me is the receiver of the action, that is,
receives help from someone. So, we can say that this is the object of the verb.
We have got a similar case in this other sentence. Check it out:

Do you have it in another size?


Você tem isso em outro tamanho?

By the context, we know this question refers to the dress, even though we didn’t
use the word dress in the sentence. Instead, we used the pronoun it, which is the
object of the verb. That means that someone has the dress, and not the other
way around.
In the previous examples, me refers to I, and it replaces dress. That means that
me and it work as object pronouns: they represent the objects of the verbs. In
that sense, they are opposite to subject pronouns, which represent the agents
of actions.

< voltar para o índice


78
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Check out a list of the object pronouns and the subject pronouns they refer to:

Subject Pronoun Object Pronoun


(executa a ação) ( recebe a ação)
I me
you you
he him
she her
it it
we us
you you
they them

In short, subject pronouns do the action, and the object pronouns receive the
action. For the first person singular, use me. For the second person singular,
you. It is the same word we use to represent the subject pronoun, but we can see
their difference in the context.
For the third person singular, we have him for masculine, her for feminine, and it
for all the other cases, except for people. Notice that we also use the word it as a
subject pronoun, but the context will show the difference.
In the plural, for the first person, we have us. For the second person, you.
Again, always pay attention to the context to find out if it is singular or plural,
subject or object pronoun. And for the third person plural, we have them.

Let’s see some examples of the use of object pronouns:

OBJE CT PRONOUNS

The customer is looking for a shirt.


O(A) cliente está procurando por uma camisa.

He/She is looking for it.


Ele/Ela está procurando por ela/ele/isso.

Here, the customer is performing the action of looking for something. So, the
customer is the subject of the verb. To replace it, we will use a subject pronoun.
Since customer can be either male or female, we can use he or she.

< voltar para o índice


79
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And what is he or she looking for? A shirt. So, the shirt suffers the action of
being looked for. Then we use an object pronoun to replace it. Shirt is a singular
noun, so, we use it.
Sometimes, the object of the verb will be a person. Have a look:

OBJE CT PRONOUNS

The salesperson is helping my parents.


O(A) vendedor(a) está ajudando os meus pais.

He/She is helping them.


Ele/Ela está ajudando eles.

The salesperson can be replaced with he or she, since it is the subject of the sentence—He or
she is helping my parents, or them, which is the object of the sentence.
To recognize the subject, we ask who does the action of the main verb. Since it is a question
to find out the subject, we call it who (subject). Check it out:

WHO (SUBJE CT )

Who is helping the customer? Who are helping the customer?


Quem está ajudando o cliente? Quem estão ajudando o cliente?

To ask a question using who (subject), we take the affirmative form, remove the
subject, and use who in its place.
Notice that the question with who (subject) is always in the third person
singular, “Who is helping?”. It makes no sense to ask it in the plural, “Who are
helping?”, it is not correct. Regardless of the answer, this question will always be
in the singular.
The previous example was in the present continuous, so we just keep the verb to
be as an auxiliary verb.

< voltar para o índice


80
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now, let’s ask a question with who (subject) in the simple present:

WHO (SUBJE CT )

Who usually knows the right size for you?


Quem geralmente sabe o tamanho certo para você?

Notice that we did not use the auxiliary verb do, which is normally
used in questions in the simple present. Following the same logic as
before, we take the sentence in the affirmative form and just place
who where the subject would be.
As you already know, questions using who (subject) are always
asked in the singular. That’s why we use the suffix -S in the main
verb, knows, so that we conjugate it in the third person singular.
A possible answer for that question would be:

WHO (SUBJE CT )

Who usually knows the right size for you?


Quem geralmente sabe o tamanho certo para você?

Salespeople usually know the right size for you.


Vendedores normalmente sabem o tamanho certo pra você.

The answer in this case is salespeople, which is in the third person plural. As
you can see, only the questions must always be in the third person singular.
We can also use who to find out the person who receives the action. It is called
who (object). Take a look:

WHO (OBJE CT ) + INTERROGATIVE FORM

Who is the salesperson helping?


Quem o vendedor está ajudando?

< voltar para o índice


81
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that now we follow the general structure of the interrogative form. The
sentence is in the present continuous, so we start with who and then add the
interrogative form: is the salesperson helping. That is, we need to place the
auxiliary verb to be before the subject.
By now, it should be clear that questions with who refer to a person, no matter
if it is the subject or the object. With that in mind, a possible answer to that
question can be as follows:

WHO (OBJE CT )

Who is the salesperson helping?


Quem o vendedor está ajudando?

The salesperson is helping the customer.


O vendedor está ajudando o cliente.

Here, the customer is the person who is being helped by the salesperson, that is, he/she is the one who is
receiving the action. So, it is the object of the sentence.
In this case, the verb help is related to only one object, but some verbs admit two objects. That is the case
of the verb to buy, for example, as we buy something to someone. There are two objects for this verb: one
refers to a thing, and the other refers to a person.
Have a look at the next example:

WHO (OBJE CT )

Foreign customers usually buy presents for their relatives.


Clientes estrangeiros normalmente compram presentes para seus parentes.

The direct object is the one that refers to a thing, in this case, presents; and the
indirect object is introduced by a preposition: for their relatives. Since the indirect
object refers to a person, we will ask the question using who. Check it out:

WHO (OBJE CT )

Who do foreign customers usually buy presents for?


Para quem clientes estrangeiros normalmente compram presentes?

< voltar para o índice


82
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that we are using the simple present, so we use the structure of the interrogative form
in the simple present. We have the question word who, then the auxiliary verb do, the subject,
foreign customers, and the complement. Also notice that the preposition to must be placed at
the end of the question.
In other words, some questions using who (object) need extra attention, for the verb may
admit more than one object and generate a question with a preposition.
So far, we’ve seen sentences in which the subject is different from the object, and we use
object pronouns to refer to the one who receives the action. But sometimes the subject and
the object are the same person. Take a look at this sentence:

SUBJE CT = OBJE CT

I’m buying the shirt for myself.


Eu estou comprando a camisa para mim mesmo.

In this sentence, the subject is I. And there are two objects: one is shirt, and the
other is me. That is, I am buying the shirt, and it is a gift for me. So, the subject
and the object refer to the same person. In this case, we use reflexive pronouns
to refer to the object of the verb. And the reflexive pronoun for the subject
pronoun I is myself.

Let’s see the list of reflexive pronouns related to the subject pronouns.
Take a look:

Subject Pronouns Reflexive Pronouns


(executa a ação) ( recebe a ação)
I myself
you yourself
he himself
she herself
it itself
we ourselves
you yourselves
they themselves

< voltar para o índice


83
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Unfortunately, there is no general rule to form the reflexive pronouns, so the best
is to practice so you can get used to them. But we can say that the termination
-self is used for the pronouns in the singular, and -selves is used for the ones in
the plural.
Let’s see more examples.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Are you buying it for yourself or someone else?


Você está comprando para você mesmo ou para outra pessoa

In this sentence, the subject is you, so we use the reflexive pronoun yourself.
Another one:

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

My mother likes to buy shoes for herself.


Minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos para ela mesma.

The subject now is my mother, which can be related to the subject pronoun she,
so, in this case, the corresponding reflexive pronoun is herself.
And in both these cases, the question with who will follow the same logic as the
object pronoun. For the first example, we would have:

WHO (OBJE CT ) AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Who are you buying it for?


Para quem você está comprando isso?

For myself.
Para mim mesmo(a).

< voltar para o índice


84
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And in the other example:

WHO (OBJE CT ) AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Who does my mother like to buy shoes for?


Para quem minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos?

For herself.
Para ela mesma.

As you can see, regardless of the answer, the question will be asked
the same way.

In this chapter, we talked about subject, object, and reflexive


pronouns and the question word who. If you want to learn
more about these topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide
section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Object Pronouns Page 232 w


Question Word Who Page 278 w
Reflexive Pronouns Page 288 w
Subject Pronouns Page 323 w

< voltar para o índice


85
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Choose the option that describes the kind of pronoun used in the sentences.

a) Could you help me find the right size of d) She is looking for it.
dress? Ela está procurando por isso.
Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho
certo de vestido?
( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
( 2 ) Object Pronoun
( 1 ) Subject Pronoun ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
( 2 ) Object Pronoun
( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun

b) Do you have it in another size? e) He is helping them.


Você tem isso em outro tamanho? Ele está ajudando eles.

( 1 ) Subject Pronoun ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun


( 2 ) Object Pronoun ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun

c) My mother likes to buy shoes for herself. f) I’m buying the shirt for myself.
Minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos para ela Eu estou comprando a camisa para mim
mesma. mesmo.

( 1 ) Subject Pronoun ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun


( 2 ) Object Pronoun ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.

a) has many dresses to show.


Ela tem muitos vestidos para mostrar.

b) Could you help find the right size of dress?


Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?

< voltar para o índice


86
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

c) My mother likes to buy shoes for .


Minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos para ela mesma.

f. myself
d. them
e. you
Activity B – Answers
d) She is helping .
Ela está ajudando eles.

c. herself
e) Who usually knows the right size for ?

a. She
b. me
Quem geralmente sabe o tamanho certo para você?

f) I’m buying the shirt for .

Activity A – Answers
Eu estou comprando a camisa para mim mesmo.

d. 1
e. 2
f. 3
b. 2
a. 2

c. 3

< voltar para o índice


87
Shopping
for Shoes.
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, we will focus on specific vocabulary related to buying shoes.


We will also see some grammar topics that will help you interact in this kind of
situation.
Now, look at the script of Shopping for Shoes.

SHOPPING FOR SHOES

[At a store]
Lucas:
So, by now you’re probably guessing that the American system for
measuring shoes is also quite unique, and you would be absolutely
right! The big thing to know about this is that sizes for men’s shoes and
women’s shoes are actually different.

Amy:
A better way to put it is that they use the same system. So, we have
sizes ranging from 5 to 12, or even up to 14 for men. And they also
come in half-sizes, so five and a half, six, six and a half, so on and so
forth. But the sizes are measured differently between men and women.

Lucas:
Which is kind of weird...

Amy:
It is weird!

Lucas:
Yeah, let’s show them!

Amy:
OK!

[Showing two pairs of shoes]


Lucas:
OK, you guys! So, what we were saying earlier: these are two different
pairs of shoes, but they are technically the same size, they’re both the
size 8. This is a man’s size 8.

< voltar para o índice


89
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
This is a woman’s 8W.

Lucas:
Right, so they’ll always be marked. Sometimes men’s shoes will be
marked with an M, sometimes the women’s shoes will be marked with
a W, so you will be able to look at the markings to see which one is for
women and which one is for men.

Amy:
But we’re going to show you how different these sizes are!

[Comparing the shoes]


Lucas:
I mean, let’s see if you guys can see, they’re touching...You can see
across the top that the women’s shoe is noticeably smaller than the
men’s shoe. So, you have to definitely take note of that, because this is a
uniquely American experience!

Amy:
Yeah, you do not want to go home with the wrong size shoes.

Lucas:
Especially if you’re shopping for someone else! Make sure that you know
that you’re looking at a men’s shoe size, or a women’s shoe size. And if
all else fails, you can take out your measuring tape and measure it!

[Interviewing a sales associate]


Lucas:
OK, everyone! So, we have Lynn here, who’s going to answer some
questions about shoes! So, first of all, what kind of shoes do you carry
here?

Lynn:
We carry hiking shoes, athletic tennis shoes, we carry work shoes.

Lucas:
Lots of different kinds?

Lynn:
Lots of different kinds of shoes, summer shoes, sandals, slippers, boat
shoes, all kinds...

Lucas:
Great! So, for all different activities! All different types of weather and
seasons.

< voltar para o índice


90
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Do you have a lot of international clients or visitors come through?

Lynn:
In the summertime we get quite a few visitors, and also around the
holidays; we do also have people from different countries that are
coming here to spend the holidays.

Amy:
Do they ask for help with the difference in shoe sizing between the
systems?

Lynn:
Sometimes they do. And European sizes are different than our sizes
here, so sometimes we'll have to ask them what size of shoe, sometimes
we’ll have to look inside their shoe and try to compare to get it as close
as possible to what we have here!

Lucas:
So, you do have ways of helping them make that translation.

Lynn:
Absolutely! We always try to help the customer!

Lucas:
Do you have any advice for international customers that you might want
to throw out there?

Lynn:
Just look around; if you have questions, ask. We’ll help you with sizes
and compare prices with different things we carry in the store.

Lucas:
Well, thank you, Lynn! That was really helpful! Thanks a lot!

Lynn:
I’m glad I was able to help!

Lucas:
Thank you!

< voltar para o índice


91
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

COMPRANDO CALÇADOS

[Em uma loja]


Lucas:
OK, você provavelmente já adivinhou que o sistema americano para o
tamanho de sapatos também é peculiar, e você está totalmente certo!
É importante saber que os tamanhos masculinos e femininos são
diferentes.

Amy:
Uma maneira melhor de dizer isso é que eles usam o mesmo sistema.
Os tamanhos variam de 5 a 12, ou até mesmo 14 para homens. E
também há tamanhos como cinco, cinco e meio, seis e seis e meio,
e assim por diante. Porém, esses tamanhos são medidos de forma
diferente entre homens e mulheres.

Lucas:
O que é um pouco estranho...

Amy:
É estranho, sim!

Lucas:
Sim! Vamos mostrar para eles!

Amy:
OK!

[Mostrando dois pares de calçados]


Lucas:
OK, pessoal! Como estávamos falando antes, temos dois pares
diferentes de tênis, que, tecnicamente, têm o mesmo tamanho: ambos
são tamanho 8. Este é um tamanho 8 masculino.

Amy:
Este é um tamanho 8 feminino.

Lucas:
Certo, então eles são marcados. Às vezes, tênis masculinos são
marcados com um M, e, às vezes, tênis femininos são marcados com um
W. Então, você poderá ver e procurar por esses detalhes para saber qual
é o feminino e qual é o masculino.

Amy:
Mas vamos mostrar as diferenças desses tamanhos!

< voltar para o índice


92
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Comparando os calçados]
Lucas:
Como vocês podem ver, eles estão se tocando... Você pode ver na ponta
que o feminino é claramente menor do que o tênis masculino. Logo, você
definitivamente tem que se lembrar disso, pois isso é uma experiência
singularmente americana!

Amy:
Exato! Você não quer voltar para casa com o tamanho de tênis errado.

Lucas:
Especialmente caso esteja comprando para outra pessoa! Certifique-se
de saber diferenciar um tênis masculino de um tênis feminino. E, se tudo
o mais der errado, você sempre pode usar a fita métrica para medi-lo!

[Entrevistando uma vendedora]


Lucas:
OK, galera! Estamos aqui com a Lynn, que vai nos responder algumas
perguntas sobre calçados! Primeiramente, que tipos de calçados vocês
vendem aqui?

Lynn:
Nós vendemos botas para trilha, tênis para esporte, sapatos sociais...

Lucas:
Inúmeros tipos?

Lynn:
Inúmeros tipos de calçados, calçados mais casuais, sandálias, chinelos,
galochas, vários tipos...

Lucas:
Ótimo! Para todas as atividades! Todo tipo de atividade ou clima!

Amy:
Vocês recebem muitos visitantes internacionais?

Lynn:
Durante o verão recebemos alguns turistas, e também mais perto das
festas de fim de ano. Também recebemos pessoas de países diferentes
que vieram passar o fim de ano aqui.

Amy:
Eles pedem ajuda com a diferença entre os tamanhos de calçados?

< voltar para o índice


93
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Lynn:
Algumas vezes sim. Tamanhos europeus são diferentes dos nossos, e às
vezes temos que perguntar qual o tamanho que os clientes usam, ou até
mesmo olhar dentro dos seus calçados para comparar e chegar o mais
perto possível do que temos aqui.

Lucas:
Então você tem ferramentas para ajudar nessa tradução?

Lynn:
É claro! Nós sempre tentamos ajudar nossos clientes!

Lucas:
Você tem algum conselho para clientes internacionais que você queira
compartilhar?

Lynn:
Dê uma olhada e, caso tenha perguntas, é só chamar! Vamos te ajudar
com tudo isso: tamanhos, comparar os preços com outros artigos que
vendemos na loja...

Lucas:
Muito obrigado, Lynn! Isso nos ajudou muito! Muito obrigado!

Lynn:
Que bom que pude ajudar!

Lucas:
Obrigado!

< voltar para o índice


94
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Some stores categorize shoes by age and gender. Look:

CATE GORIES

Women’s shoes Men’s shoes Kids’ shoes


Calçados femininos Calçados masculinos Calçados infantis

You can find shelves or even whole aisles for these categories. They may also be subdivided
according to their use.

Casual shoes are more comfortable and used for everyday activities.
For example:

CASUAL SHOES

Sandals Flip-flops Trainers and Sneakers


Sandálias Chinelos Tênis

Ballerinas / Ballet flats Rubber boots Moccasins


Sapatilhas Galochas Mocassins

< voltar para o índice


95
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Dress shoes are considered formal wear, which means they are used in work
environments, and at fancy parties or weddings. For example:

DRESS SHOES

Pumps High-heels
Scarpins Sapatos de salto alto em geral

Stilettos Oxfords
Sapato de salto agulha Sapatos sociais masculinos

Just like clothes, shoe sizes are different in the U.S. The stores will
probably have size charts that compare sizes. If you need any help,
you can approach the salesperson and say:

Excuse me. Could you help me find the right shoe size?
Você pode me ajudar a achar o tamanho de sapato certo?

< voltar para o índice


96
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

You can also say the size you are used to wearing and they will help you find the
corresponding one there. Here is what you can say:

My kid is a size 23 in Brazil. What’s the corresponding size here?


Meu filho / Minha filha usa tamanho 23 no Brasil. Qual o tamanho
correspondente aqui?

My kid’s foot is 14 cm long. What shoe size will fit him/her?


O pé do meu filho / da minha filha mede 14 cm. Qual tamanho de sapato
vai servir nele(a)?

And the salesperson may respond:

You should get a size 7. Or a 7 and half if you’re buying sneakers.


Você deveria levar o tamanho 7. Ou 7 e meio, se for comprar tênis.

After choosing the shoes, it is time to pay for them.


If you have questions about the price, ask:

How much is it?


Quanto custa?

And the salesperson may answer:

It’s 60 dollars plus taxes.


São 60 dólares mais impostos.

Remember that the sales taxes in the United States are not included in the
prices you see on the tags. So, when you check out at the cashier, they will add
everything up and tell you the total amount. Suppose sales taxes in a city are
10%, and the product costs 60 dollars. Then they will say:

It will be 66 dollars.
Ficou em 66 dólares. / O total é 66 dólares.

< voltar para o índice


97
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

You can see the separate amounts in the receipt. If


you have a voucher, you can say:

I have a voucher/coupon.
Eu tenho um cupom de desconto.

Then they will discount the value, inform you the


new amount, and probably ask one of the following:

How would you like to pay?


Como você gostaria de pagar?

Will it be cash or credit?


Vai ser em dinheiro ou no cartão de crédito?

To which you can answer:

I’ll pay cash.


Vou pagar em dinheiro.

I’ll pay with my credit card.


Vou pagar com meu cartão de crédito.

Now you know how to interact in stores and at the


cashier using vocabulary related to shoes.

< voltar para o índice


98
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Shoes ( ) Sandálias

( 2 ) Shoe sizes ( ) Mocassins

( 3 ) Sandals ( ) Tênis

( 4 ) F lip-flops ( ) Galochas

( 5 ) Pumps ( ) Sapatos/Calçados

( 6 ) High-heels ( ) Chinelos

( 7 ) Stilettos ( ) Sapatilhas

( 8 ) Oxfords ( ) Sapato de salto alto

( 9 ) Sneakers ( ) Scarpins

( 10 ) Ballerinas ( ) Sapatos sociais masculinos

( 11 ) Rubber boots ( ) Tamanhos de sapatos

( 12 ) M
 occasins ( )S
 apato de salto agulha

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) Excuse me. Could you help me find the right d) I have a .


? Eu tenho um cupom de desconto.
Você pode me ajudar a achar o tamanho de
sapato certo?
e) How would you like to ?
Como você gostaria de pagar?
b) You should get a size 7. Or a 7 and half if
you’re, buying .
f) Will it be cash or ?
Você deveria levar o tamanho 7. Ou 7 e meio,
Vai ser em dinheiro ou no cartão de crédito?
se for comprar tênis.

c) It’s 60 dollars plus .


São 60 dólares mais impostos.
Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers
3/ 12 / 9 / 11 / 1 / 4 / a. shoe size d. voucher/coupon
10 / 6 / 5 / 8 / 2 / 7 b. sneakers e. pay
c. taxes f. credit

< voltar para o índice


99
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we will talk about the possessive case, possessive adjectives,
possessive pronouns, and the question word whose.
When we want to classify or describe an object, we can use the possessive case:
the apostrophe + S. For example:

POSSESSIVE CASE

Anna’s shoes are old and ugly. She needs new ones.
Os sapatos da Anna estão velhos e feios. Ela precisa de sapatos novos.

In this example, we are using a proper noun, Anna, with the apostrophe + S and the
noun shoes. It means that the shoes belong to Anna.
It is also possible to talk about possession using the apostrophe + S with a
common noun. Let’s see an example:

My kid’s foot is 14 cm long.


O pé do meu filho / da minha filha mede 14 cm.

Here we have the word kid, which is a common noun. We add the apostrophe +
S and the word foot to indicate that part of the body as belonging to the kid we are
talking about.
And we use both the possessive case and the possessive pronouns to show that
someone owns something. Let’s take a look at an example we have already seen
to better understand it:

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES

Anna’s shoes are old and ugly.


Os sapatos da Anna são velhos e feios.

Her shoes are old and ugly.


Os seus sapatos / Os sapatos dela são velhos e feios.

< voltar para o índice


100
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

To replace the structure Anna + apostrophe + S, we


POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES
can use the corresponding possessive adjective for a
woman in the singular, which is her.
Notice that we are using the possessive adjective and My kid’s foot is 14 cm long.
the noun that represents the possessed object. Now, O pé do meu filho mede 14 cm.
let’s do the same with this other sentence, look:
His foot is 14 cm long.
O pé dele mede 14 cm.

In the example, let’s suppose the kid we are talking about is a boy. In this case,
the possessive adjective is his. So, we will replace kid’s with the corresponding
possessive adjective: his.
And once again, the possessive adjective is followed by what belongs to boy—
foot. Notice that the possessive adjective his replaces kid’s, but we also removed
my from the sentence, because it wouldn’t make sense to leave it there.
In short, the possessive adjective replaces the noun + apostrophe + S. Let’s take
a look at the possessive adjectives and what they refer to:

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES


Singular Plural

my our
First Person First Person
meu(s), minha(s) nosso(s), nossa(s)

your your
Second Person
seu(s), sua(s), teu(s), tua(s) Second Person seu(s), sua(s), vosso(s),
vossa(s), de vocês
his
seu(s), sua(s), dele
her their
Third Person
seu(s), sua(s), dela Third Person seus, suas, deles, delas
its
seu(s), sua(s), dele, dela

The possessive adjectives will always be followed by the object to


which we refer. For example: my shoes, your shoes, their shoes,
and so on.
Now, imagine the following dialogue:

< voltar para o índice


101
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVE VS. POSSESSIVE PRONOUN

Karen: Your boots are very pretty.


Suas botas são muito bonitas.

Lia: Thank you. But they are not my boots.


They are my mother’s. Possessive Adjective
Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.

Or

Lia: Thank you. But they are not mine.


They are my mother’s. Possessive Pronoun
Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.

When Karen starts talking to Lia, she says your boots, which includes the
possessive adjective and the noun.
Then, Lia may choose to answer using the possessive adjective my to answer
the question. And in such case, the noun must be part of the sentence, as in:
They are not my boots.
However, it is also an option to use the possessive pronoun mine, as in, “But
they are not mine.” It would not be necessary to say boots again, because we
understand it from the context. The advantage of using the possessive pronoun is
that we avoid repeating the noun and the speech sounds more natural.
That is the difference between the possessive adjective and the possessive
pronoun. When we use a possessive pronoun, we replace the structure
possessive adjective + noun.
Let’s see some more examples. Look at this sentence built with the
possessive case:

POSSESSIVE CASE

Anna needs new shoes. Anna’s shoes are old and ugly.
Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os sapatos da Anna estão velhos e feios.

< voltar para o índice


102
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Since it is not necessary to say Anna twice, we can replace Anna’s with
a possessive adjective. Look:

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVE

Anna needs new shoes. Her shoes are old and ugly
Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os sapatos dela estão velhos e feios.

Her is the corresponding possessive adjective for Anna’s.

But we still have another word being said twice: shoes. To avoid the repetition,
we will use a possessive pronoun:

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN

Anna needs new shoes. Hers are old and ugly.


Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os dela estão velhos e feios.

In this example, Hers means Her shoes or Anna’s shoes. It replaces the person who owns the
object and the object itself, so the repetition can be avoided.

Now, let’s see the complete list of possessive pronouns:

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS


Singular Plural

mine ours
First Person First Person
meu(s), minha(s) nosso(s), nossa(s)

yours yours
Second Person
seu(s), sua(s), teu(s), tua(s) Second Person seu(s), sua(s), vosso(s),
vossa(s), de vocês
his
seu(s), sua(s), dele
hers
Third Person theirs
seu(s), sua(s), dela Third Person
seu(s), sua(s), deles, delas
its
seu(s), sua(s), dele, dela

< voltar para o índice


103
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

To form the possessive pronouns, you just add -S to the end of the possessive
adjectives, unless they already end in -S, such as its and his: they will remain the
same. The only exception is mine, which is a completely different word.
Let’s have a look at some more examples.
Suppose you are at the cashier paying for your shoes and the attendant mixes
up your packages. You can say:

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

Excuse me, but these shoes are blue. Mine are black.
( my shoes)
Com licença, mas estes sapatos são azuis. Os meus são pretos.

We used the pronoun mine to replace my shoes.

Then the attendant realizes the confusion, gives you a different package, points
to a man, and says:

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

Oh, I’m sorry. These are yours. The blue shoes are his.
(your shoes) (his shoes)

Oh, me desculpe. Estes são os seus! Os sapatos azuis são dele.

In this sentence, there are two possessive pronouns: yours, which means your
shoes, and his, that replaces his shoes.

To ask question about possession, we use the question word whose. Let’s take a
look at an example:

WHOSE

Whose shoes are these?


De quem são esses sapatos?

< voltar para o índice


104
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

To make the question, we use whose followed by the possessed object, in this
case, shoes. Then we add the interrogative form of the verb: are these.
One more example:

WHOSE

Whose packages are you holding?


De quem são os pacotes que você está segurando?

Again, whose is followed by the possessed object, packages, and the interrogative form of the sentence.
And to answer this question, you can use the possessive case, possessive adjectives, or possessive
pronouns. Check it out:

WHOSE

Whose shoes are these? These are her shoes. (Possessive Adjective)
De quem são esses sapatos? Esses são os sapatos dela.

These are Anna’s shoes. (Possessive Case) These are hers. (Possessive Pronoun)
Esses são os sapatos da Anna. Esses são dela.

In this chapter, you’ve seen how to use the possessive case,


the possessive adjectives, the possessive pronouns and the
question word whose. If you want to learn more about these
topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide section at the end
of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Possessive Adjectives Page 240 w


Possessive Case Page 244 w
Possessive Pronouns Page 248 w
Question Word Whose Page 282 w

< voltar para o índice


105
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Number the sentences according to the form of possessive used in them.

( 1 ) Possessive Case
( 2 ) Possessive Adjective
( 3 ) Possessive Pronoun

a) Her shoes are old and ugly. ( )


Os sapatos dela são velhos e feios.

b) My kid’s foot is 14 cm long. ( )


O pé do meu filho / da minha filha mede 14 cm.

c) Thank you. But they are not mine. They are my mother’s. ( )
Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.

d) Anna needs new shoes. Hers are old and ugly. ( )


Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os dela estão velhos e feios.

e) The blue shoes are his. ( )


Os sapatos azuis são dele.

f) His foot is 14 cm long. ( )


O pé dele mede 14 cm.

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.

a) shoes are old and ugly. She needs new ones.


Os sapatos da Anna estão velhos e feios. Ela precisa de sapatos novos.

b) shoes are old and ugly. She needs new ones.


Os sapatos dela são velhos e feios. Ela precisa de sapatos novos.

< voltar para o índice


106
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

c) foot is 14 cm long.
O pé dele mede 14 cm.

Activity B – Answers
d) Thank you. But they are not mine. They are my .

d. mother’s
Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.

f. Whose
a. Anna’s

g. theirs
e. Hers
b. Her
c. His
e) Anna needs new shoes. are old and ugly.
Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os dela estão velhos e feios.

Activity A – Answers
f) shoes are these?
De quem são esses sapatos?

d. 3
b. 1
a. 2

e. 3
c. 1

f. 2
g) These are .
Esses são deles.

< voltar para o índice


107
Shopping
for Cosmetics.
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, we will talk about shopping for cosmetics. Nowadays, men and
women seem to care about their self-image, and this is one of the fastest growing
industries in the world. Buying cosmetics in the United States is a whole new
world. We will cover a few words and sentences related to this topic, and also
some grammar that will improve your skills in the language.
Take a look at the script of Shopping for Cosmetics.

SHOPPING FOR COSME TICS

[At a drugstore]
Lucas:
So, in a lot of countries all over the world, going to the pharmacy or to
the drugstore doesn’t really sound like a good time. It's where you go to
pick up medications and stuff like that.

Amy:
But that’s not how it works in the U.S.!

Lucas:
Definitely not!

Amy:
You can find press-on nails, nail polish, make-up, candy, party balloons,
birthday cards, everything! I know it might sound weird, but in the U.S.,
convenience stores are kid-friendly places. And you can find toys and
groceries...

Lucas:
I mean, most of the time, people don’t actually go to a drugstore to get
medicine, although you can. But that isn’t always the reason why people
go.

Amy:
Maybe you want to just pick up some cosmetics! You can find all sorts
of make-up, perfume, nail polish, moisturizers, almost whatever you can
think of!

< voltar para o índice


109
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Showing a product on the shelf]


Amy:
Oh, look at that giant bottle of argan oil!

Lucas:
Wow, that’s really good!

[Walking around the drugstore]


Lucas:
So, back to what we were talking about before: if you’re looking for a
specific brand, or even a luxury brand, then chances are you want to go
to one of those specialized stores for that.

Amy:
The advantage of going to those stores is that you’ll have sales
reps who can help make suggestions for you or answer any specific
questions you might have.

Lucas:
But if you’re thinking price, now this is something that you really need
to look into, because you’re going to find really good deals all over the
place. I’m talking about some “buy one get, one free” offers, or lots of
variations on that. Because I know I’ve seen some “buy one, get two
free,” or “buy one, get one 50% off.” I mean, there’s lots of possibilities
there that you should really, really take advantage of.

Amy:
You definitely want to reserve some time to check these out, because
they’re so worth it!

[Interviewing a make-up sales professional]


Amy:
Hi, guys! I'm here with Gabriel, who is a make-up sales professional, and
we’re going to find out a lot about make-up and buying it in America!
So, what is the best place to buy it? A drugstore? Online? A specialty
boutique?

Gabriel:
It really depends on what you’re looking for. If you’re looking for just
something for day to day, you can get that at a pharmacy. Or just a local
kind of little cheaper store, that’s fine. But if you’re looking for higher
end, maybe better blushes and eyeshadows and that kind of make-up,
it’s better to go to a specialty store because they’ll usually have people
like me, who are familiar with all the products in the store. And they’ll
be able to help you pick an item that’ll be best for you. In most cosmetic
stores, they have a demonstration.

< voltar para o índice


110
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
What do you think about men wearing make-up? Because I see a lot of
that in West Hollywood; specially I see men with better skin than me!

Gabriel:
Well, there are different levels of men wearing make-up...

Amy:
What about a way to do it that’s subtle and unnoticeable?

Gabriel:
Well, that’s best to use foundations, and concealer is actually the most
popular thing that men get. Because it helps with the under-eye, and
then maybe a little light eyeliner helps as well. I mean, obviously you
don’t paint it on, but if you dab it a little around the eye, it helps define
the eye.

Amy:
Thank you so much for this information that you gave us today!

COMPRANDO COSMÉ TICOS

[Em uma drogaria]


Lucas:
Em muitos países pelo mundo, ir a uma farmácia ou drogaria não soa
como algo divertido. São lugares onde você vai para comprar remédios e
coisas do tipo.

Amy:
Mas não é assim que funciona nos EUA!

< voltar para o índice


111
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Lucas:
Definitivamente não!

Amy:
Você pode comprar unhas postiças, esmalte, maquiagem, balas, balões
pra festa, cartões de aniversário, tudo! Eu sei que soa como algo
estranho, mas, nos EUA, lojas de conveniência são lugares para ir com
seus filhos. Você pode encontrar brinquedos, comida...

Lucas:
Quer dizer, na maioria das vezes, as pessoas não vão à farmácia para
comprar remédios, apesar de isso acontecer. Mas esse nem sempre é o
motivo da sua visita!

Amy:
Talvez você queira comprar alguns cosméticos! Você pode encontrar
todo tipo de maquiagem, perfume, esmalte, hidratantes, tudo o que você
pensar!

[Mostrando um produto na prateleira]


Amy:
Nossa, um frasco grande de óleo de argan!

Lucas:
Uau, que ótimo!

[Andando pela drogaria]


Lucas:
Voltando um pouco ao que havíamos falado anteriormente, se você está
à procura de uma marca específica ou até mesmo de luxo, talvez seja
melhor você ir até uma loja especializada!

Amy:
As vantagens dessas lojas é que haverá vendedores especializados que
podem fazer sugestões ou responder perguntas mais específicas que
você possa ter.

Lucas:
Mas, caso você esteja pensando em preços, isso é algo que você talvez
precise pesquisar, porque você vai conseguir achar ótimas promoções
em vários lugares! Estou falando de promoções “compre um, leve dois”,
ou variações dela! Porque sei que já vi algumas de “compre um, leve
dois” ou “compre um, e ganhe 50% de desconto na outra unidade”.
Existem muitas possibilidades que você deveria aproveitar!

< voltar para o índice


112
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Você com certeza deve reservar parte do seu tempo para conhecer
essas lojas, pois elas valem muito a pena!

[Entrevistando um vendedor de maquiagem]


Amy:
Oi, pessoal! Estou aqui com o Gabriel, que é um vendedor de
maquiagem profissional, e vamos aprender muito sobre maquiagem
e como comprá-la nos Estados Unidos! Qual é o melhor local para
comprar maquiagem? Uma drogaria, na internet, uma loja especializada?

Gabriel:
Depende do que você está procurando. Se você quer algo para o dia
a dia, você pode ir até a farmácia, ou uma loja local e mais barata. Mas
caso queira algo mais caro, talvez blushes melhores, e sombras e outros
tipos de maquiagem, é melhor visitar uma loja especializada, pois lá vai
haver pessoas, como eu, que conhecem bem os produtos da loja e vão
conseguir lhe ajudar a escolher o melhor produto para você. Na maioria
das lojas de cosméticos, eles fazem demonstrações.

Amy:
Qual sua opinião sobre homens usando maquiagem? Porque eu vejo
muitos usando aqui por West Hollywood, e vejo muitos homens com
pele melhor que a minha!

Gabriel:
Bem, há diferentes níveis de homens usando maquiagem...

Amy:
Qual seria um jeito de usá-la de modo sutil e imperceptível?

Gabriel:
Bem, é melhor usar uma boa base, e corretivo é algo muito popular entre
homens que usam maquiagem. Porque ajuda muito com as olheiras, e
talvez um delineador bem de leve, que também ajuda. Claro, não é para
pintar o olho todo, mas talvez passar um pouco em volta dele; isso ajuda
a defini-lo melhor!

Amy:
Muito obrigada pelas dicas que você nos deu hoje!

< voltar para o índice


113
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Many people think like that:

Pharmacies are places where you go to pick up medication.


Farmácias são lugares aonde você vai para pegar medicamentos.

In the United States, however, you do not find only medication at pharmacies or drugstores:

Pharmacies, which are also called drugstores, offer lots of cosmetics options.
Farmácias, que também são chamadas de drogarias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos.

At American drugstores, you can find haircare products. Look:

HAIRCARE PRODUCTS

shampoo conditioner
xampu condicionador

anti-dandruff shampoo hair mask


xampu anticaspa máscara de hidratação capilar

anti-hair loss shampoo hair dye


xampu antiqueda tintura para cabelo

< voltar para o índice


114
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

If you are looking for skincare products, you can find:

moisturizers anti-aging creams


hidratantes creme anti-idade

And other cosmetics for everyday care that are cheaper than fancy brands, such as:

make-up make-up remover


perfume
maquiagem removedor de maquiagem

At drugstores, you can also find free samples that you can take home and try
before buying. In short:

At drugstores, there are lots of possibilities that you should take


advantage of.
Nas drogarias, há várias possibilidades que você deve aproveitar.

If you are looking for designer-brand perfumes and make-up, you


should go to specialty stores. And here is a piece of advice for you:

You might wanna try them on before buying.


É uma boa ideia você experimentar os produtos antes de comprar.

To do that, look for testers, which are products that are available to
the public. And if you are not sure something can be tested, just ask.
Suppose you want to test a foundation; you can say:

Can I test this foundation?


Eu posso experimentar essa base?

< voltar para o índice


115
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Pay attention to the verb test. It is the most appropriate in this context, but if you
are at a shoes or clothing store, for instance, you can’t say:

Can I test these shoes?


Posso testar esses sapatos?

For clothes and shoes, you can only use try on. So, the right sentence is:

Can I try these shoes on?


Eu posso experimentar esses sapatos?

Since we are on make-up products, here is a list of what you can find at drugstores:

MAKE-UP PRODUCTS

Foundation Mascara Lipstick Powder Blush


Base Rímel Batom Blush em pó

Eyeshadow Eyeliner
Concealer
Sombra para os Delineador para
Corretivo
olhos os olhos

And there is one more advantage of specialty stores. Let’s see:

< voltar para o índice


116
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

At specialty stores, there are people who can help you choose the right make-up for you.
Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa para você.

To find the right foundation, the sales associates


usually start by assessing your skin tone, such as:

light skin dark skin


pele clara pele escura

If you are looking for eye shadows, the sales associate


might ask you:

What color palette would you rather try?


Que paleta de cores você prefere experimentar?

And you can answer:

I like the nude one.


Eu gosto da nude.

Notice that the pronoun one replaces the word palette to avoid repetitions in the discourse.
And, in the plural form, we use ones. For example:

I prefer the nude and golden ones.


Eu prefiro a nude e a dourada.

Now you know the cultural aspects of buying


cosmetics in the U.S and how to buy them.

< voltar para o índice


117
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Drugstore ( ) Rímel

( 2 ) Medication ( ) Condicionador

( 3 ) Cosmetics ( ) Base

( 4 ) Make-up ( ) Batom

( 5 ) Anti-dandruff shampoo ( ) Medicamento

( 6 ) Anti-hair loss shampoo ( ) Tintura para cabelo

( 7 ) Conditioner ( ) Drogaria

( 8 ) Foundation ( ) Cosméticos

( 9 ) Hair mask ( ) Máscara de hidratação capilar

( 10 ) Hair dye ( ) Xampu anticaspa

( 11 ) Mascara ( ) Maquiagem

( 12 ) L
 ipstick ( )X
 ampu antiqueda

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) Pharmacies, which are also called drugstores, d) At , there are people who
offer lots of options. can help you choose the right make-up for you.
Farmácias, que também são chamadas de dro- Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que
garias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos. podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa
para você.
b) At , there are lots of
possibilities that you should take advantage of. e) What color would you
Nas drogarias, há várias possibilidades que você rather try?
deve aproveitar. Que paleta de cores você prefere experimentar?

c) Can I test this ? f) I prefer the nude and ones.


Eu posso experimentar essa base? Eu prefiro a nude e a dourada.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


11/ 7 / 8 / 12 / 2 / 10 / a. cosmetics d. specialty store
1/3/9/5/4/6 b. drugstores e. palette
c. foundation f. golden

< voltar para o índice


118
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we will talk about the question words what and which, impersonal
pronouns, and relative pronouns.
Some question words make a difference when it comes to making choices,
and what and which are two of the most confused ones. Let’s start by trying to
untangle these concepts.
In many occasions, what and which are interchangeable. That is, we can choose
either one, and it won’t change the main idea. Like this, take a look:

WHAT = WHICH

Which/What moisturizer is good for oily skin?


Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa?

In this case, what and which are interchangeable because there are many options
to choose from, that is, there is a huge variety of moisturizers.
On the other hand, what and which will not be interchangeable when there are
few options. In this case, we have got to use which.
Check it out:

WHAT ≠ WHICH

Which moisturizer is good for oily skin: the blue one or the white one?
Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa: o azul ou o branco?

Here, the amount of options is reduced: there are only two moisturizers.
That’s why we used which.
We could also say:

Which of these moisturizers is good: the blue one or the white one?
Qual desses hidratantes é bom: o azul ou o branco?

< voltar para o índice


119
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this sentence, we used the expression Which of to refer to a group of things


from which we will choose. In this case, moisturizers. Again, we use which for a
limited number of options.
Which can also be combined with the impersonal pronoun one to avoid
repeating the noun. Observe the following dialogue:

ONE – IMPERSONAL PRONOUN

Customer: I’d like that lipstick, please.


Cliente: Eu gostaria daquele batom, por favor

Salesperson: Which one? / Which lipstick?


Vendedor(a): Qual? / Qual deles? / Qual batom?

In this context, one is not a cardinal number since it is not being used to count
anything. Here, one is an impersonal pronoun that replaces the singular noun
lipstick to avoid repetition in the discourse.
Attention: you may choose to repeat the noun in the sentence or use the pronoun
one to replace it, but you cannot simply say:

Which?
Qual?

And the answer will follow the same logic. Check it out:

Customer: The red one. / The red.


Cliente: O vermelho.

In the previous example, we used one to replace a word in the singular: lipstick.
If the noun is in the plural, then, we use ones. Once again, ones does not work as
a cardinal number in this context. Check out this next dialogue:

< voltar para o índice


120
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

ONES – IMPERSONAL PRONOUN

Customer: I’d like to see those eyeshadow palettes, please.


Cliente: Eu gostaria de ver aquelas paletas de sombra, por favor.

Salesperson: Which ones? Customer: The ones on the top shelf.


Vendedor(a): Quais? / Quais delas? Cliente: As que estão na prateleira de cima.

Here, we are talking about palettes, in the plural. So, we use the impersonal
pronouns ones in the plural too. And the answer is in the plural as well.
There is another use for which that does not refer to choices or to
defining objects.
Take a look at these pieces of information:

1 - Pharmacies offer lots of cosmetics options.


1 - Farmácias oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos.

2 - Pharmacies are also called drugstores.


2 - Farmácias também são chamadas de drogarias.

We could say these sentences as they are, separately, but it would be repetitive to say pharmacies twice.
Notice that pharmacies is the subject in both sentences, “Pharmacies offer” and “Pharmacies are.”
We are talking about an establishment, a thing. When a thing is the subject of the sentence and it is
repeated in a second piece of information, we use which to replace it, joining the two separate sentences into
one. Take a look:

WHICH – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

Pharmacies, which are also called drugstores, offer lots of cosmetics options.
Farmácias, que / as quais também são chamadas de drogarias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos.

< voltar para o índice


121
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Here, which refers back to pharmacies and it works as a relative pronoun.


If the repeated term is not the subject, but the object of the sentence, just follow
the same logic. If it is not a person, but a thing or an establishment, we use
which to join the sentences. Let’s see an example, starting with two separate
sentences. Check them out:

WHICH – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

1 - The black mascara is on sale.


O rímel preto está em promoção.

2 - I love black mascara­.


Eu amo rímel preto.

Black mascara is repeated in both sentences. In the first sentence, black


mascaras is the subject. In the second one, it is the object of the verb. To join
both, we have got to choose one sentence to replace black mascara with which.
We will replace it in the second sentence. We will start with the first sentence
and then add which with the second information, right after black mascara.
Like this:

WHICH – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

The black mascara, which I love, is on sale.


O rímel preto, que / o qual eu amo, está em promoção.

It is also possible to replace black mascara in the first sentence


too. It would be like this, check it out:

WHICH – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

I love black mascara, which is on sale.


Eu amo rímel preto, que está em promoção.

< voltar para o índice


122
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

If the term refers to a person, the relative pronoun will be who. But pay attention:
who, in this case, is not a question word. Take a look at these sentences:

WHO – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

1 – At specialty stores, there are people.


1 – Em lojas especializadas, há pessoas.

2 – The people can help you choose the right make-up for you.
2 – As pessoas podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa para você.

The repeated term is people, and this is the element of the sentence
that will be replaced with who, since it refers to individuals, persons,
not a thing or an establishment. So, we will have:

WHO – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

At specialty stores, there are people who can help you


choose the right make-up for you.
Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que podem te ajudar
a escolher a maquiagem certa para você.

As you can notice by now, the relative pronoun comes right after the term it is
replacing. So, who refers to people. We can say that who is replacing people in
the sentence where this term is the subject.
There are two more relative pronouns we will cover in this chapter. The first one
is where, and it refers to a place. Check it out:

WHERE – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

Pharmacies are places where you go to pick up medication.


Farmácias são lugares aonde você vai para pegar medicamentos.

< voltar para o índice


123
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that where is not being used as a question word; we are not asking a
question about location. It refers to the word places, the location to which you go
to pick up medication. That’s why we have to use where when we replace it in
the sentence.
You could just say the whole idea without using the relative pronoun, like this:

You go to the pharmacy to pick up medication.


Você vai à farmácia para pegar medicamentos.

The difference is that it won’t be as emphatic, because the relative pronoun gives emphasis to
the discourse.
And, last but not least, when we want to emphasize a moment, we use the relative pronoun
when. Check it out:

WHEN – REL ATIVE PRONOUN

Prefer to buy on Black Friday, when you can get cosmetics at the best prices.
Prefira comprar na Black Friday, quando você pode conseguir cosméticos com os
melhores preços.

In this case, when refers to Black Friday, that is, the moment at which you can perform an
action. In this example, buying cosmetics for very good prices. There is no question being asked
here—when is just connecting two pieces of information, emphasizing the idea that this is the
best moment to perform the action.

In this chapter, we’ve seen the question words what and which and
learned how to use impersonal and relative pronouns. If you want
to learn more about these topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide
section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Impersonal and Indefinite Pronouns Page 207 w


Question Word What Page 260 w
Question Word Which Page 275 w
Relative Pronouns Page 297 w

< voltar para o índice


124
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Number the sentences according to the function of the words in bold.

( 1 ) Question word
( 2 ) Impersonal pronoun
( 3 ) Relative Pronoun

a) Prefer to buy on Black Friday, when you can get cosmetics at the best prices. ( )
Prefira comprar na Black Friday, quando você pode conseguir cosméticos com
os melhores preços.

b) Which moisturizer is good for oily skin: the blue one or the white one? ( )
Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa: o azul ou o branco?

c) Which of these moisturizers is good: the blue one or the white one? ( )
Qual desses hidratantes é bom: o azul ou o branco?

d) The ones on the top shelf. ( )


As que estão na prateleira de cima.

e) What moisturizer is good for oily skin? ( )


Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa?

f) Pharmacies are places where you go to pick up medication. ( )


Farmácias são lugares aonde você vai para pegar medicamentos.

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.

a) moisturizer is good for oily skin: the blue one or the white one?
Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa: o azul ou o branco?

b) I’d like to see those eyeshadow palettes, please.


Eu gostaria de ver aquelas paletas de sombra, por favor.
Which ?
Quais delas?

< voltar para o índice


125
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

c) Pharmacies, are also called drugstores, offer lots of cosmetics options.


Farmácias, que também são chamadas de drogarias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos.

d) At specialty stores, there are people can help you choose the right make-up
for you.
Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa para você.

e) Pharmacies are places you go to pick up medication.


Farmácias são lugares onde você vai para pegar medicamentos.

f) Prefer to buy on Black Friday, you can get cosmetics at the best prices.
Prefira comprar na Black Friday, quando você pode conseguir cosméticos com os melhores preços.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


a. 3 d. 2 a. Which d. who
b. 2 e. 1 b. ones e. where
c. 1 f. 3 c. which f. when

< voltar para o índice


126
Shopping for
Electronics.
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, we will focus on buying electronics. You will learn a few words
and sentences related to this topic, such as names of some popular devices, and
tips on what to say and do when you go shopping for them. As usual, we will also
present you with some language items that will improve your skills in the English
language.
Take a look at the script of Shopping for Electronics.

SHOPPING FOR ELE CTRONICS

[At a store, in the electronics department]


Amy:
Electronics are on many international visitors’ wish lists, and yes, there
are many reasons to purchase your electronics in the U.S.

Lucas:
Oh, yeah! Maybe your camera accidentally took a deep-sea dive in the
ocean, or maybe someone knocked your smartphone out of your hands
and it fell onto the ground and shattered into a million pieces, or maybe
your laptop got crushed when somebody else shoved their carry-on bag
on the overhead compartment.

Amy:
Or maybe none of that happened and you just want the latest on
cutting-edge tech.

Lucas:
Or maybe that.

Amy:
But there are some pros and cons.

Lucas:
True, some pros: definitely, when you buy gadgets here you could be
getting a really fat deal! Depending on where you’re from, you might pay
a third of the price here than you would in your home country. And even
if you’re not getting a huge deal on the gadget, the benefit of buying
gadgets here in the U.S. is that you might be getting something that’s
brand new, that’s not even available in your home country yet!

< voltar para o índice


128
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
But there are some cons to consider, like warranties. Some brands and
manufacturers will honor international warranties. So, if you’re buying
out of your home country, that’s a plus, but you do have to check.

Lucas:
And another thing is the power outlet. Chances are that the United
States uses a different power outlet than you might in your home
country. So, if you buy a gadget here, you’re going to need to buy an
adaptor in order to be able to charge it. But if you have weighed the pros
and cons and you’ve made up your mind, then here’s a couple of tips for
you.

Amy:
First, you want to check the price. Depending on what you’re looking
for, if it’s a specific brand, going to that brand’s showroom, you might
be paying full retail value. Because those big, beautiful, showrooms cost
money. Whereas if you go to an authorized reseller, they might be able
to offer additional deals, promotional discounts, etc., especially if the
item is an older model.

Lucas:
And another thing to keep in mind is that, if you’re buying a new gadget,
and you’re taking it home and going through customs, you might be
importing the new device into your country. So, you should check your
country’s limits, because they might want to check a receipt and then
they will charge you an extra tax on top of what you already paid. So,
in essence, do your research. Because if you don’t, you end up paying
more than you actually saved.

[Interviewing a salesperson from the electronics department]


Amy:
OK, now we’re here with Ryan, who works in an electronics department,
and we’re going to ask him a couple of questions!

Lucas:
So, Ryan, what are some differences in the products that you have? Just
tells us a little bit about what you can.

Ryan:
In electronics, we sell more than just electronics. We sell TVs, laptops,
chargers for phones, tablets. But we also sell, maybe, laptop bags,
or other games or such. So, we sell more than what is just purely
electronics. Anything that can go with it, maybe, an electronic appliance,
or something that you think would be convenient if you have something
electronic in front of you.

< voltar para o índice


129
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Lucas:
OK, and do you often get international customers coming in?

Ryan:
Yeah, it does happen. Usually someone who’s from Europe or
something, that’ll try to look for an adaptor for a wall outlet, something
to plug in their appliances and whatnot.

Amy:
In America, we sell a lot of second-hand, or what’s called refurbished
units. Is that something that the store offers?

Ryan:
Yeah, usually if a TV is bought by one customer and for whatever reason
they return it, maybe it’s damaged or something, we’ll give it to claims,
then they’ll refurbish it. They’ll make it basically as good as new again,
but usually, since it was used already, and it was refurbished, we’ve got
a discounted price. So, that does happen with some products. And we’ll
offer those at a discounted price, so it’s usually good for the consumer
that way.

Lucas:
And are there still guarantees with products like that?

Ryan:
Yes, there’s still a guarantee. There’s a warranty that can be bought.
Claims won’t let anything go back here that isn’t pretty much as good
as new. It’s just that: if a consumer or customer wants one thing that’s
refurbished, or a brand-new product, they'll get the brand-new product,
so we still have a discounted price for the refurbished one.

Lucas:
Alright, great! Thanks a lot, Ryan!

Ryan:
No problem, thank you!

< voltar para o índice


130
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

COMPRANDO ELE TRÔNICOS

[Em uma loja, no setor de eletrônicos]


Amy:
Eletrônicos estão na lista de desejos de muitos visitantes internacionais,
e, sim, existem várias razões para comprá-los nos EUA.

Lucas:
Sim! Talvez a sua câmera tenha dado um mergulho no mar, ou talvez
alguém tenha derrubado seu smartphone das suas mãos e ele caiu
no chão, se estilhaçando todo! Ou talvez alguém tenha esmagado seu
laptop ao colocar a bagagem no compartimento superior do avião!

Amy:
Ou talvez nada disso tenha acontecido, e você só quer o que há de novo
em tecnologia de ponta.

Lucas:
Ou talvez isso!

Amy:
Como sempre, há prós e contras.

Lucas:
É verdade, alguns prós são óbvios. Quando você compra eletrônicos
aqui, você pode estar economizando muita grana! Dependendo do seu
país de origem, você pode pagar até um terço do preço aqui, comparado
com o preço original do produto em seu país. E mesmo que você não
esteja fazendo um grande negócio, o benefício de comprar eletrônicos
aqui nos EUA é que você pode estar conseguindo algo novo em folha
que ainda não está disponível no seu país!

Amy:
Mas temos alguns contras para se levar em consideração, como
garantias. Algumas marcas cobrem garantias internacionais. Logo, se
você está comprando algo no exterior, isso é um bom adicional, caso
seja confirmado.

Lucas:
Outra coisa é a tomada. Muito provavelmente os Estados Unidos
usam um padrão de tomada diferente do que você usa no seu país de
origem. Logo, se você comprar um eletrônico aqui, talvez precise de um
adaptador para conseguir carregá-lo. Se você já pesou os prós e contras
e se decidiu, temos algumas dicas para você.

< voltar para o índice


131
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Primeiramente, confira o preço. Dependendo do que você estiver
procurando, se for uma marca específica e você for a um showroom,
talvez tenha que pagar o preço cheio, porque essas lojas enormes e
lindas custam dinheiro. Mas se você for a um revendedor autorizado,
talvez eles consigam te oferecer alguma promoção ou desconto,
principalmente se o artigo for de um modelo antigo.

Lucas:
Outra coisa a se considerar é que, se você está comprando um
eletrônico, levando-o para casa e passando pela alfândega, você pode
estar importando esse novo aparelho para seu país. Logo, confira os
limites alfandegários do seu país, porque eles podem pedir a nota fiscal,
para então cobrar um imposto sobre o valor que você já pagou. Ou
seja, pesquise. Caso contrário, você pode acabar pagando mais do que
economizou!

[Entrevistando um vendedor do setor de eletrônicos]


Amy:
Agora estamos aqui com o Ryan, que trabalha no departamento de
eletrônicos, e vamos lhe fazer algumas perguntas!

Lucas:
Ryan, quais algumas diferenças dos produtos que você tem à venda?
Conte-nos um pouco sobre eles!

Ryan:
No setor de eletrônicos, vendemos mais do que somente eletrônicos.
Vendemos TVs, laptops, carregadores para telefones e tablets, mas
também vendemos mochilas para laptop, jogos... Logo, vendemos mais
do que produtos eletrônicos. Qualquer coisa que possamos vender junto
com um eletrônico, ou algo que achamos que possa ser conveniente se
você estiver diante de algum eletrônico.

Lucas:
OK, e você recebe muitos clientes internacionais?

Ryan:
Sim, recebemos. Normalmente é algum europeu, por exemplo,
procurando por um adaptador de tomada, algo para ligar seus
aparelhos...

Amy:
Nos Estados Unidos, vendemos muita coisa de segunda mão, o que
chamamos de unidades recondicionadas. Vocês vendem elas aqui?

< voltar para o índice


132
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Ryan
Sim, se uma televisão foi comprada por um cliente e, por qualquer
razão, ela foi devolvida, talvez por algum defeito ou algo do tipo, nós
a encaminhamos para o setor responsável, e eles fazem os reparos.
Eles vão deixar o aparelho como novo. Mas, por ele já ter sido usado e
recondicionado, nós damos um desconto no preço. Isso acontece com
alguns produtos, e oferecemos eles com preços mais baixos, o que
acaba sendo bom para o consumidor!

Lucas:
Esses produtos têm garantia?

Ryan:
Sim, você pode comprar uma garantia. Nada volta à venda sem que
esteja como novo. É assim: se um cliente ou consumidor quer um
produto recondicionado, ou novo em folha, ele escolhe o zerado. Então,
ainda temos o preço com desconto para o recondicionado!

Lucas:
Beleza, ótimo! Muito obrigado, Ryan

Ryan:
Sem problemas, eu que agradeço!

< voltar para o índice


133
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

In this chapter, we are going to see some vocabulary related to electronics.


The word technophiles refers to people who love technology and don’t miss a launch:

They are always after the latest cutting-edge tech.


Eles sempre estão atrás das tecnologias avançadas mais atuais.

The United States still attracts many electronics buyers. Look at a list of some of the most-
wanted products:

ELE CTRONICS

laptop computers /
cell phones flat-screen TVs
notebooks
telefones celulares televisões de tela plana
computadores portáteis

video game consoles


earphones and joysticks speakers
fones de ouvido consoles de vídeogame caixas de som
e controles

< voltar para o índice


134
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

But there are some things to consider when shopping for electronics abroad.
For example:

The plug might not fit the power outlet you have back home.
O plugue do aparelho pode não encaixar na tomada que você tem em casa.

You might have to buy an adaptor to be able to charge the device.


Você pode precisar comprar um adaptador para conseguir carregar o aparelho.

Another thing to keep in mind is the warranty:

Some products have free technical assistance during warranty.


Alguns produtos têm assistência técnica gratuita durante a garantia.

They can be either repaired or replaced in case of defect.


Eles podem ser consertados ou trocados em caso de defeito.

But some companies don’t offer international coverage, which means that:

The warranty might not apply to your home country.


A garantia pode não ser válida no seu país de origem.

Here are some advantages of buying electronics in the U.S.:

You may find products that haven’t been launched in your home country yet.
Você pode encontrar produtos que ainda não foram lançados no seu país de origem.

Depending on the situation, you might pay one third of the price you would back home.
Dependendo da situação, você pode pagar um terço do preço que você pagaria em casa.

Depending on where you shop in the U.S., you might get big fat deals.
Dependendo de onde comprar nos EUA, você pode conseguir belos descontos.

< voltar para o índice


135
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

If the product you want is still too expensive, you may opt for second-hand refurbished items:

Stores commonly buy used products or with minor damages and resell them.
É comum que as lojas comprem produtos usados ou com pequenos defeitos e os revendam.

They repair the damage before reselling the product.


Elas consertam os defeitos antes de revender o produto.

They will be as good as new for a lower price.


Esses produtos estarão tão bons quanto os novos, por um preço menor.

These products have warranty too. You should check their coverage just the
same. And no matter which electronics you buy, refurbished or brand-new:

Always keep the receipt.


Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.

In this chapter, you’ve seen saw how to buy electronics in


the U.S. and learned some vocabulary related to it.

< voltar para o índice


136
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Big fat deals ( 7 ) Earphones ( ) Telefone celular ( ) Tecnologia


avançada
( 2 ) Cutting-edge ( 8 ) Joystick ( ) Aparelho
tech ( ) Controle de
( 9 ) Speakers ( ) Caixas de som
vídeogame
( 3 ) The latest
( 10 ) Power outlet ( ) Garantia
( ) Tomada
( 4 ) Notebook
( 11 ) Device ( ) Computador portátil
( ) Fones de ouvido
( 5 ) Cell phone
( 12 ) Warranty ( ) Belos descontos
( )A
 s(os) mais atuais
( 6 ) Flat-screen TV
( ) TV de tela plana

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) They are always after d) Depending on where you shop in the U.S., you
cutting-edge tech. might get .
Eles sempre estão atrás das tecnologias Dependendo de onde comprar nos EUA, você
avançadas mais atuais. pode conseguir belos descontos.

b) The might not fit the e) They will be as good as new for a
power outlet you have back home. .
O plugue do aparelho pode não encaixar na Esses produtos estarão tão bons quanto os novos,
tomada que você tem em casa. por um preço menor.

c) You might have to buy an f) Always keep the .


to be able to charge the device. Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.
Você pode precisar comprar um adaptador para
conseguir carregar o aparelho.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


5/ 11 / 9 / 12 / 4 / 1 / a. the latest d. big fat deals
6 / 2 / 8 / 10 / 7 / 3 b. plug e. lower price
c. adaptor f. receipt

< voltar para o índice


137
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we will be talking about the modal verbs may and might and the use of the
structures will and be + going to to refer to the future.
We have already seen that the structure be + going to is used to refer to plans. For example:

BE + GOING TO
Plans

My friends and I are going to travel to the United States in three months.
Meus amigos e eu vamos viajar para os Estados Unidos em três meses.

I’m going to buy a new cell phone there.


Eu vou comprar um celular novo lá.

Both examples convey the idea of plans already made at the moment of speaking.
They also imply that everything is set for the trip, since it is an event that has been
planned for some time.
We can also use be + going to to make a prediction based on present events.
In other words, there is evidence that this prediction is quite probable to happen.
Look at this dialogue:

BE + GOING TO
Prediction Based on Evidence

John: I know we planned to go shopping today. But look at the sky;


it’s really cloudy. It’s going to rain soon.
Eu sei que a gente tinha planejado ir às compras hoje. Mas olha o
céu; está muito nublado. Vai chover daqui a pouco.

Anna: No problem, we can go tomorrow.


Sem problema, a gente pode ir amanhã.

John: Deal.
Fechado.

< voltar para o índice


138
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Based on the evidence that the sky is too cloudy, John made a prediction that it
is going to rain, so he used be + going to.
We can also predict that something will happen based on previous knowledge
or experience, not necessarily because of physical evidence, but because it is a
common or frequent situation. For example, the prices of electronics tend to drop
on Black Friday, so we can make a prediction based on that. Check it out:

BE + GOING TO
Prediction Based on Experience

On Black Friday, there are going to be big fat deals on electronics.


Na Black Friday, vai ter descontos muito bons em eletrônicos.

Once again, we are using the structure be + going to to emphasize that this
prediction is quite probable.
Another way to refer to the future is by using will. This is the most natural way to
talk about future events. Will and be + going to differ in structure and use. Let’s
start with the structure:

WILL
Affirmative Form

Subject + Will + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Will + Verbo Principal + Complemento

When the subject of the sentence is a subject pronoun, it is possible to contract


it with will. For example: I will becomes I’ll, you will becomes you’ll, and so on.
Now, look at the structure in the negative form:

WILL
Negative Form

Subject + Will + Not (Won’t) + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Will Not (Won’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


139
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

All we have got to do is place not right after will, or we can use won’t, which is
the contraction of will + not. The contracted form won’t is more frequently used
in the oral language, and it is more informal.
Finally, the interrogative form:

WILL
Interrogative Form

Will + Subject + Main Verb + Complement


Will + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

In the interrogative form, we place will before the subject, then we add the main verb, and
then the complement.
When we use will to talk about future events, we convey the idea that we have just decided
to do something. That is the main difference in use when we compare will and be + going to.
Will expresses an immediate decision, not something we have been planning to do.
For example, let’s suppose a customer is at a store, really interested in a cell phone. Then a
salesperson approaches the customer to speak well about it. Let’s see:

WILL
Immediate Decision

Salesperson: It’s a great cell phone, and it comes with a one-year warranty.
Vendedor(a): É um ótimo celular, e ele vem com um ano de garantia.

Customer: OK, I will take it. / OK, I’ll take it.


Cliente: Tudo bem, vou levar o celular.

In this context, it is clear that the customer’s decision was made immediately after
the salesperson spoke of the advantages of that product. It was not a plan to take
that specific cell phone.
Notice that the full form is used for emphasis.
We can also use will to talk about predictions. But when we compare it to be +
going to in this context, we see that there is a subtle difference between them.
When we use will to make a prediction, the idea we convey is that we believe
something will happen based on our opinion and point of view. So, back to the
dialogue, the salesperson can say something like this:

< voltar para o índice


140
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

WILL
Prediction Based on Opinion

Salesperson: You’ll love this cell phone. You won’t regret it.
Vendedor(a): Você vai amar esse celular. Você não vai se arrepender.

We can see two predictions the salesperson makes: he or she believes the
customer will love the cell phone and will not regret it. It is the salesperson’s
opinion that it will happen.
As you can see, it is different from the idea conveyed by be + going to, which
emphasizes or highlights that there is real evidence to sustain that prediction.
And that means it is quite probable to happen.
It goes without saying that when it comes to the future, certainty is questionable,
and we can only express degrees of probability.
There are two modal verbs we can use to refer to probability. They are may and
might. They obey the same structure as any other modal verb. Check it out:

MODAL VERBS
May and Might

Affirmative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal + Complemento.

Negative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Interrogative Form
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


141
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

May expresses a probability of around 50% of something happening, and might


expresses a remote probability, something around 20% or 30%. But remember
these numbers are just illustrations.
Let’s see some examples. Pay attention to the following dialogue:

MAY AND MIGHT


Probability

Salesperson: The power outlet here may be different from the one
used in your country.
Vendedor(a): A tomada daqui pode ser diferente da usada no seu país.

Salesperson: You may need an adaptor to charge the cell phone.


Vendedor(a): É possível / Pode ser que você precise de um adaptador
para carregar o telefone.

In this case, we are using may because there is a good chance the plug won’t fit
the power outlet in the customer’s country. So, in this case, an adaptor may be
necessary.
Let’s continue the dialogue:

MAY AND MIGHT


Probability

Customer: That’s true. Do you sell it here?


Cliente: É verdade. Vocês vendem aqui?

Salesperson: We do, but I don’t know if we still have it. I might have
one left. I’ll look for it in the back.
Vendedor(a): Vendemos, mas eu não sei se ainda temos. Talvez / Pode
ser que eu ainda tenha um. Vou procurar nos fundos.

He or she is using might to show there is a remote probability that


they still have one left. Moreover, notice the salesperson is using
will when saying: I’ll look for it. That conveys the idea that the
salesperson has just decided to check it for the customer.
In the affirmative form, might is also very used to give suggestions
in a subtle way. It is usually followed by wanna, the contracted form of
want to, before the main verb. Let’s see:

< voltar para o índice


142
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

MIGHT WANNA + VERB


Suggestion

You might wanna compare prices before buying electronics in the United States.
É uma boa ideia comparar preços antes de comprar eletrônicos nos Estados Unidos.

You might wanna check if the manufacturer offers international warranty.


É aconselhável verificar se o fabricante oferece garantia internacional.

In this chapter, we talked about the modal verbs may and


might; we also learned how to use the structures will and be
+ going to to refer to the future. If you want to learn more
about these topics, look at the Grammar Guide section at the
end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Be + Going To (Future) Page 193 w


Modal Verb May Page 221 w
Modal Verb Might Page 224 w
Will Page 327 w

< voltar para o índice


143
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Choose the most suitable idea conveyed by the sentences.

a) On Black Friday, there are going to be big fat deals on electronics.


Na Black Friday, vai ter descontos muito bons em eletrônicos.

( ) Prediction based on experience


( ) Probability

b) You might wanna compare prices before buying electronics in the United States.
É uma boa ideia comparar preços antes de comprar eletrônicos nos Estados Unidos.

( ) Plan
( ) Suggestion

c) You’ll love this cell phone. You won’t regret it.


Você vai amar esse celular. Você não vai se arrepender.

( ) Prediction based on opinion
( ) Prediction based on evidence

d) You may need an adaptor to charge the cell phone.


Pode ser que você precise de um adaptador para carregar o telefone.

( ) Probability
( ) Suggestion

e) My friends and I are going to travel to the United States in three months.
Meus amigos e eu vamos viajar para os Estados Unidos em três meses.

( ) Immediate decision
( ) Plan

< voltar para o índice


144
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) You check if the manufacturer offers international warranty.


É aconselhável verificar se o fabricante oferece garantia internacional.

b) You this cell phone. You won’t regret it.


Você vai amar esse celular. Você não vai se arrepender.

c) You need an adaptor to charge the cell phone.


É possível que você precise de um adaptador para carregar o telefone.

d) My friends and I are to the United States in three months.


Meus amigos e eu vamos viajar para os Estados Unidos em três meses.

e) I know we planned to go shopping today. But look at the sky; it’s really cloudy soon.
Eu sei que a gente tinha planejado ir às compras hoje. Mas olha o céu; está muito nublado. Vai chover
daqui a pouco.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


a. Prediction based on experience a. might wanna / might want to
b. Suggestion b. will love / ’ll love
c. Prediction based on opinion c. may/might
d. Probability d. going to travel
e. Plan e. It is (it’s) going to rain / It’s gonna rain

< voltar para o índice


145
Shopping for
Appliances.
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, we will learn some tips on the best moments to go shopping in the
U.S., as well as some words and sentences related to buying home appliances.
Now look at the script of Shopping for Appliances.

SHOPPING FOR APPLIANCES

[At a store, in the home appliances section]


Amy:
Chances are, if you’re an international visitor, you’re probably not
shopping for large appliances like laundry machines, refrigerators, and
dishwashers.

Lucas:
But you do have the chance to browse around some of the American
brands! Now, on the other hand, small household appliances like juicers,
or blenders, food processors, or small domestic robots… those might
very well be on your wish list.

Amy:
And you’ll have a lot of options to choose from: different brands, models,
and price ranges. If you do your research, you’ll find some really good
deals! So, here’s another piece of information that’ll help you save some
bucks. There are sales going on in the city all the time, all throughout the
year. But there are certain times of the year that seasonal items will go
on additional sales.

Lucas:
And it’s usually during or after holidays. National holidays and some
other special days are a really good time to go shopping. Like Black
Friday!

Amy:
Or Christmas! That’s another good one, when there are sales right
around then and in other countries too.

< voltar para o índice


147
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Lucas:
So, there are a lot of national holidays that are specific to the United
States that international travelers may not even know about. So, for
example, Martin Luther King Day falls on the 3rd Monday of January,
every year. And this is a really good holiday to get home décor and
clothing.

Amy:
If you’re looking for jewelry, February is your month!

Lucas:
Oh, yeah! So, Valentine’s day falls on February 14th, which means that,
from February 15th, all the way to the end of the month, you’re going to
get some really big deals on jewelry, up to half price on jewelry!

Amy:
If you’re looking for appliances, then your month is May! Memorial Day
falls on the last Monday of May, and it’s our holiday to celebrate our
fallen soldiers!

Lucas:
And this long, three-day weekend is an excellent time to get appliances!

Amy:
Although, to be honest, there are sales going on all the time. There’s so
much competition! So, pretty much whatever you’re looking for, there’s
going to be a deal somewhere if you just look for it!

[Interviewing a sales associate from an appliance store]


Lucas:
Hey, everybody! So, I have Gregory right here, what kind of store do you
work at?

Gregory:
It’s an appliance store.

Lucas:
So, do you often have international customers come in?

Gregory:
Yeah, we do, we do!

Lucas:
What tips might you have for them? For international customers?

< voltar para o índice


148
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Gregory:
I would say that if you’re looking to buy supplies of any type and you’re
an international customer, I would come in the fall or the spring. It’s
typically the time of the year when things are discounted.

Lucas:
Oh, really? So, you’re saying that the products are cheaper in the fall or
the spring?

Gregory:
It’s because in the winter, typically things are priced up for the holidays.
And then, in the summer, people are typically building things.

Lucas:
And you don’t really...I’m not sure if you do or not, but do you often have
international customers buying some of those larger products?

Gregory:
You know, we typically don’t! Because it’s hard to ship those things back.
You can sometimes get warranties on certain items for international
shipping, but it really just depends on the item.

Lucas:
Good to know! Cool! Thanks, Gregory!

Gregory:
Thanks!

COMPRANDO ELE TROPORTÁTEIS

[Em uma loja, no setor de eletroportáteis]


Amy:
É bem provável que, por ser um visitante estrangeiro, você não esteja
à procura de eletrodomésticos grandes, como lavadoras de roupas,
geladeiras ou lava-louças.

Lucas:
Porém, você tem a oportunidade de dar uma olhada em marcas
americanas! Por outro lado, eletroportáteis como espremedores de fruta,
liquidificadores, processadores de comida, ou pequenos robôs podem
estar na sua lista de desejos!

< voltar para o índice


149
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Amy:
Você terá muitas opções para escolher, faixas de preço, marcas e
modelos diferentes! Se você pesquisar bem, vai encontrar ótimas
promoções! Aqui vai mais um conselho que vai te ajudar a poupar
alguns dólares! Há promoções acontecendo a toda hora, durante o ano
todo! Mas em algumas épocas do ano alguns itens sazonais entram em
promoção!

Lucas:
Isso acontece geralmente durante ou após as festas de fim de ano.
Feriados nacionais e outras datas especiais são ótimas oportunidades
para negócios! Como a Black Friday!

Amy:
Ou o Natal! Essa é outra boa data, há sempre promoções nessa época,
assim como em outros países.

Lucas:
Existem vários feriados específicos aos Estados Unidos que os turistas
talvez não conheçam. Por exemplo, o Dia de Martin Luther King sempre
cai na terceira segunda de janeiro de todo ano. E esse é um ótimo
feriado para comprar objetos de decoração e roupas.

Amy:
Se você está procurando por joias, fevereiro é o seu mês!

Lucas:
Sim, o Dia de São Valentim é 14 de fevereiro, o que significa que, a
partir de 15 de fevereiro até o final do mês, você vai encontrar ótimas
promoções de joias. Algo como 50% de desconto!

Amy:
Se você está à procura de eletrodomésticos, maio é o melhor mês! O
Memorial Day cai na última segunda de maio, e é o feriado em que
celebramos nossos soldados mortos em guerras.

Lucas:
Esse feriado prolongado é uma época ótima para comprar
eletrodomésticos!

Amy:
Mas sendo bem sincera, existem promoções durante o ano todo, a toda
hora. É um mercado competitivo! Qualquer que seja o artigo que você
procura, deve haver alguma promoção. É só procurar bem!

< voltar para o índice


150
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Entrevistando um vendedor]
Lucas:
Pessoal, este é o Gregory; em que tipo de loja você trabalha?

Gregory:
Em uma loja de eletrodomésticos.

Lucas:
Você recebe turistas com frequência?

Gregory:
Sim, recebemos!

Lucas:
Que dicas você tem para eles? Para clientes estrangeiros...

Gregory:
Eu aconselharia que, se você quer comprar eletrodomésticos de
qualquer tipo e você é um cliente estrangeiro, venha no outono ou
na primavera. É normalmente a época do ano em que temos mais
descontos.

Lucas:
É mesmo? Você está dizendo que os produtos são mais baratos no
outono e na primavera?

Gregory:
É porque, durante o inverno, os preços são mais altos por causa das
festas de fim de ano. E durante o verão há muitas pessoas fazendo
reformas.

Lucas:
E você não... Eu não sei ao certo, mas é normal ver turistas comprando
eletrodomésticos maiores?

Gregory:
Normalmente não, porque é difícil despachar esses artigos. Às vezes
você consegue garantias internacionais para alguns artigos, mas isso
depende muito do produto.

Lucas:
Legal, bom saber! Obrigado, Gregory!

Gregory:
Obrigado!

< voltar para o índice


151
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

National holidays affect the prices of products in the United States:

On national holidays we often find products with big discounts.


Nos feriados nacionais, nós frequentemente encontramos produtos
com grandes descontos.

Martin Luther King Day is one of the most important American national holidays:

Martin Luther King Day is celebrated on the third Monday of January.


O Dia de Martin Luther King é celebrado na terceira segunda-feira de janeiro.

It’s a great moment to buy home décor and clothing items.


É uma época ótima para comprar artigos de decoração e roupas.

Valentine’s Day is the day of love in the U.S.:

Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th.


O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro.

People exchange gifts, cards, and flowers, and they often propose
to their sweethearts. As a consequence:

From February 15th to the end of the month, jewelry is sold for lower prices.
De 15 de fevereiro até o fim do mês, as joias são vendidas por preços mais baixos.

< voltar para o índice


152
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Two holidays are considered the best ones for shopping for electronics and appliances.
The first one is Memorial Day:

Memorial Day is celebrated on the last Monday of May.


O Memorial Day é celebrado na última segunda-feira de maio.

If you want to buy TVs and laptops, Memorial Day sales will be the best choice for you.
Se quiser comprar TVs e notebooks, o Memorial Day vai ser a melhor opção para você.

The other one is Black Friday:

Black Friday is on the fourth Friday of November, right after Thanksgiving.


A Black Friday é na quarta sexta-feira de novembro, logo depois do Dia de Ação de Graças.

If you want to buy video games and small appliances, you’ll find good deals on Black Friday.
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday.

As for small appliances, in the U.S it is possible to find a lot of options, such as:

SMALL APPLIANCES

Electric juicer Food processor


Blender Toaster
Espremedor de Processador de
Liquidificador Torradeira
frutas alimentos

Air fryer Vacuum cleaner Robot vacuum cleaner


Fritadeira sem óleo Aspirador de pó Robô aspirador

< voltar para o índice


153
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And there are great options of large appliances too. Let’s check out some of them:

L ARGE APPLIANCES

Dishwasher Stove Oven


Lava-louças Fogão Forno

Washing machine Refrigerator


Lavadora de roupas Geladeira

The voltage in the U.S. is different from the one in many other countries:

Most appliances and devices in the United States are 120v.


A maioria dos eletrodomésticos e eletrônicos nos Estados Unidos
tem voltagem de 120v.

You’d better look for dual voltage appliances.


É melhor procurar por eletrodomésticos bivolt.

< voltar para o índice


154
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

To learn about the voltage, you can ask one of these questions:

Excuse me. What’s the voltage of this toaster?


Com licença. Qual a voltagem dessa torradeira?

Do you have dual-voltage appliances?


Você tem aparelhos bivolt?

And you might also want to know about the warranty:

Is there any warranty?


Tem alguma garantia?

Does it have international warranty?


Ele tem garantia internacional?

In this chapter, you’ve learned some of the best moments


to go shopping in the U.S., as well as some vocabulary
and sentences related to appliances.

< voltar para o índice


155
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Small appliances ( 7 ) Blender ( ) Fogão ( ) Forno

( 2 ) Stove ( 8 ) Electric juicer ( ) Espremedor de ( ) Lavadora de roupas


frutas
( 3 ) Refrigerator/ ( 9 ) Oven ( ) Liquidificador
Fridge ( ) Processador de
( 10 ) Dishwasher ( ) Geladeira
alimentos
( 4 ) Toaster
( 11 ) Washing ( ) Lava-louças
( ) Voltagem
( 5 ) Food processor machine
( )A
 spirador de pó
( ) Eletroportáteis
( 6 ) Vacuum cleaner ( 12 ) Voltage
( ) Torradeira

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) Martin Luther King Day is celebrated on the third of January.


O Dia de Martin Luther King é celebrado na terceira segunda-feira de janeiro.

b) Valentine’s Day is celebrated on 14th.


O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro.

c) So, from February 15th to the end of the month, is sold for lower prices.
Então, de 15 de fevereiro até o fim do mês, as joias são vendidas por preços mais baixos.

d) If you want to buy video games and , you’ll find good deals on Black Friday.
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday.

e) Excuse me. What’s the of this toaster?


Activity A – Answers
Com licença. Qual a voltagem dessa torradeira? 2/ 8 / 5 / 12 / 1 / 4 /
9 / 11 / 7 / 3 / 10 / 6

f) Does it have international ? Activity B – Answers


a. Monday
Ele tem garantia internacional? b. February
c. jewelry
d. small appliances
e. voltage
f. warranty

< voltar para o índice


156
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we are going to talk about conditionals, the modal verb would,
the simple past, and regular and irregular verbs.
Conditionals are sentences that mention known facts or hypothetical situations
and their consequences. There is more than one kind of conditional sentences.
Let’s start with the zero conditional. It is used to talk about facts, for it expresses
the idea that a situation repeatedly happens the same way. For example:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

When you heat ice, it melts.


Quando você aquece o gelo, ele derrete.

This is an unquestionable relationship of cause and consequence that will


happen again and again. Notice that the condition is in the simple present: you
heat ice; and so is the consequence: it melts. The word when joins these ideas.
We can use if instead of when. It would be like this:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

If you heat ice, it melts.


Se você aquecer o gelo, ele derrete.

The zero conditional does not imply a relationship marked at a specific time
in the past, present, or future. It expresses a relationship of cause and
consequence that is always the same, no matter when it happens. Thus, it can
also be called real conditional.
So, the basic structure is:

< voltar para o índice


157
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

ZERO CONDITIONAL = REAL CONDITIONAL

If + Simple Present Simple Present


cause consequence

Use: the relationship of cause and consequence is always the same.


Uso: a relação de causa e consequência é sempre a mesma.

But the first conditional is a bit different. We use it to talk about a result or
consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
Suppose you are going to travel to the U.S. soon, so you are thinking about all the
shopping you are going to do there. You can say:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If I have the money, I will buy some small appliances.


Se eu tiver dinheiro, eu vou comprar alguns eletroportáteis.

Here, there is a condition starting with If, and even though it is something you are only
imagining, it is totally possible to happen. You can save some money until the day you leave so
you will be able to afford the appliances you want.
The consequence of having the money will be to buy some small appliances. The imaginary
condition is in the simple present and the result is in the future, so we use will to indicate it.
The first conditional follows a basic structure:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If + Simple Present Will


condition consequence

Use: the relationship of cause and consequence is imaginary, but possible to happen.
Uso: a relação de causa e consequência é imaginária, mas possível de acontecer.

< voltar para o índice


158
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The condition is in the simple present, introduced by If, and the consequence is in the future, expressed
with will. Let’s see some examples:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If you want to buy TVs and laptops, Memorial Day sales will be the best choice for you.
Se quiser comprar TVs e notebooks, o Memorial Day vai ser a melhor opção para você.

If you want to buy video games and small appliances, you’ll find good deals on Black Friday.
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday.

In both sentences, we introduced the condition using If, conjugated the verb in
the simple present, and the consequence was formed with will. Both state an
imaginary situation that is possible to happen.
Now, let’s see another relationship of condition and consequence that is also
imaginary, but, this time, not possible to happen: the second conditional.
In this case, both the condition and the consequence are hypothetical. To
express that, the condition is in the simple past, and the consequence is
formed with the modal verb would. This is the basic structure:

SE COND CONDITIONAL

If + Simple Past Would


condition consequence

Use: the relationship of cause and consequence is imaginary and


impossible to happen.
Uso: a relação de causa e consequência é imaginária e impossível de
acontecer.

But before we continue, let’s understand the verb forms involved in the
formation of the second conditional.
Let’s start with the simple past of the verb to be. As usual, the verb To Be has its
own rules. Check out the affirmative form:

< voltar para o índice


159
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE


Affirmative Form

I was you were he/she/it was

we were you were they were

As you can see, there are only two possible conjugations: was or were.
The affirmative form does not admit contractions.
Now, observe the negative form:

SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE


Negative Form

I was not you were not he/she/it was not


(wasn’t) (weren’t) (wasn’t)

we were not you were not they were not


(weren’t) (weren’t) (weren’t)

To form the negative, we add not right after the verb. It admits contractions only
between the verb and the particle not.
Now, take a look at the interrogative form:

SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE


Interrogative Form

was I…? were you…? was he/she/it…?

were we…? were you…? were they…?

< voltar para o índice


160
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Observe that, to form the interrogative, we invert the verb and the subject,
following the same logic as in the simple present of the verb to be. Have a look at
an example:

SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE

Joe was at the store to buy new appliances because they were on sale.
O Joe estava na loja para comprar novos eletrodomésticos porque eles
estavam em promoção.

Here, we have Joe as the subject, which is equivalent to he, so we used was.
There is yet another subject in this sentence: they. It refers to new appliances.
Therefore, the verb to be was conjugated as were.
For the simple past of the other verbs, we will follow the same logic as the
simple present for the other verbs.
Let’s see the general structure of the simple past. First, the affirmative form:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS


Affirmative Form

Subject + Main Verb (Past) + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo Principal no Passado + Complemento

For example:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

Joe liked the blender and the juicer.


O Joe gostou do liquidificador e do espremedor de frutas.

< voltar para o índice


161
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

You know that verbs in the past are divided into two groups: regular verbs, to which we add
-ed, -ied, or -d, depending on the base form. And irregular verbs, which don’t follow a pattern,
so each verb has its own past form.
In the example, we have the verb to like, which is regular. So, we used liked.
Let’s see an example with an irregular verb now:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

Joe bought only the blender.


Joe comprou só o liquidificador.

To buy is an irregular verb, and its form in the past is bought.


Now, let’s see the structure in the negative form. Look:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

Subject + Auxiliary Verb Did + Not (Didn’t) + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar Did + Not (Didn’t) + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento

Just like with the simple present, we need an auxiliary verb here. In the simple
past, the auxiliary verb is did, which is the verb do in the past. Then, after the
auxiliary did, we add not. And there is also the contracted form didn’t.
And, once again, just like the simple present, when we use the auxiliary verb,
the main verb remains in its base form. Check out this example:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

Joe didn’t have enough money to buy both the blender and the juicer.
O Joe não tinha dinheiro o suficiente para comprar o liquidificador e o
espremedor de frutas.

< voltar para o índice


162
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that we used didn’t and the verb have in its base form.
Finally, the interrogative form:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS


Interrogative Form

Auxiliary Verb Did + Subject + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement


Verbo auxiliar Did + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento

As you can see, the auxiliary verb did is placed before the subject.
Look at the example:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

Did Joe buy the blender and the juicer?


O Joe comprou o liquidificador e o espremedor de frutas?

Notice that we started the sentence with the auxiliary verb did; then we added
Joe as the subject; then, the verb buy in its base form.
Bear in mind that the simple past will be necessary to form the second
conditional, which is the main focus here. Besides that, as you already know, we
will also need the modal verb would.
The basic structure we use for would follows the same rules as every modal
verb. Let’s see:

WOULD

Affirmative Form
Subject + Would + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Would + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Negative Form
Subject + Would + Not (Wouldn’t) + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Would + Not (Wouldn’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Interrogative Form
Would + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Would + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


163
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

As a modal verb, would accompanies the main verb, altering the tone of the sentence. Would
conveys an idea of hypothesis to the verb. We use would to talk about things that we wanted to
happen, but that are not really possible.

Now that we have learned the verb forms we needed, let’s see how the second conditional works.

In the previous examples, we referred to Joe. He wanted to buy two appliances but ended up
taking just one. When he got to the checkout, he may have thought:

SE COND CONDITIONAL

If I had more money, I would buy the blender and the juicer.
Se eu tivesse mais dinheiro, eu compraria o liquidificador e o espremedor de frutas.

Here, if introduces the condition expressed in the simple past. That means that Joe, in fact,
doesn’t have more money. And if this condition is imaginary, the result can only be imaginary
too. It is just a hypothesis. That’s why we use would to refer to the consequence. Buying two
appliances can only happen in Joe’s imagination.

So, in short, this sentence expresses a situation that is imaginary but impossible.

There is just one little detail about the second conditional—when we express an imaginary
condition using the verb to be, there is a change in the conjugation.

As you know, the conjugation of the verb to be can be either was or were. But in this case,
we will only use were. You can even hear some people saying was, but it is not grammatically
correct. Let’s see an example:

SE COND CONDITIONAL

If I were Joe, I would save money before going shopping.


Se eu fosse o Joe, eu economizaria dinheiro antes de ir às compras.

< voltar para o índice


164
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice two things:

1. It is a hypothetical situation, because I can’t be Joe. That is only possible in my


imagination;
2. The conjugation of the verb to be in the simple past for the first person
singular is generally was. But, in this case, we have to use were, no matter who
the subject of the sentence is.

Conditionals are very much used in everyday English. The most important thing
is to understand the idea each one of them conveys and to use the correct verb
form to express that.

In this chapter, we talked about conditionals, the modal verb would,


the simple past, and regular and irregular verbs. If you want to learn
more about these topics, look at the Grammar Guide section at the end
of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Conditionals Page 197 w


Irregular Verbs – Past Page 212 w
Modal Verb Would Page 229 w
Regular Verbs Page 293 w
Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 304 w

< voltar para o índice


165
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Choose the most suitable idea conveyed by the sentences.

a) If I have the money, I will buy some small appliances.


Se eu tiver dinheiro, eu vou comprar alguns eletroportáteis.

( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.


( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.

b) When you heat ice, it melts.


Quando você aquece o gelo, ele derrete.

( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.


( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.

c) If I had more money, I would buy the blender and the juicer.
Se eu tivesse mais dinheiro, eu compraria o liquidificador e o espremedor de frutas.

( 1 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
( 2 ) Hypothetical situation that is only possible in one’s imagination.

d) If you heat ice, it melts.


Se você aquecer o gelo, ele derrete.

( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.
( 2 ) Hypothetical situation that is only possible in one’s imagination.

e) If you want to buy video games and small appliances, you’ll find good deals on Black Friday.
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday.

( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.


( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.

< voltar para o índice


166
Chapter 8 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

f) If I were Joe, I would save money before going shopping.


Se eu fosse o Joe, eu economizaria dinheiro antes de ir às compras.

( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.


( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) When you heat ice, it .


Quando você aquece o gelo, ele derrete.

e. would buy / ’d buy


b) If I have the money, some small appliances.
Se eu tiver dinheiro, eu vou comprar alguns eletroportáteis.

d. bought

f. were
c) If you to buy video games and small appliances,
you’ll find good deals on Black Friday.

Activity B – Answers
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas

b. I will (I’ll) buy


ofertas na Black Friday.

a. melts

c.want
d) Joe only the blender.
Joe comprou só o liquidificador.

Activity A – Answers
d. 1
e. 2
e) If I had more money, I the blender and the juicer.

f. 1
Se eu tivesse mais dinheiro, eu compraria o liquidificador e o espremedor de
frutas.
b. 1
a. 2

c. 2
f) If I Joe, I would save money before going shopping.
Se eu fosse o Joe, eu economizaria dinheiro antes de ir às compras.

< voltar para o índice


167
Online
Shopping.
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, we will learn some words and sentences related to shopping
online, as well as some language items to help you improve your English skills.
Now look at the script of Online Shopping.

ONLINE SHOPPING

[Amy and Lucas are on a busy street]


Amy:
Did you know that recent surveys have shown that over 80% of
Americans have already shopped online? It’s not just a trend, it’s actually
a behavioral shift. And every day there are more and more things
offered for sale online.

Lucas:
So, in the U.S., you can buy online pretty much anything that you can
buy in a physical store. I mean, you can get gadgets, appliances, clothes,
even groceries.

Amy:
And like everything else in life, there are pros and cons. Online, you can
price compare between a dozen stores in minutes, versus taking hours
driving around brick and mortar stores.

Lucas:
And you know what? The other thing is that online, you have a lot more
options. But a brick and mortar store is going to be limited by space, so
they’re not going to have as much stock.

Amy:
Speaking of cons, when you do shop online, you don’t get to try things on.

Lucas:
That is true, but chances are you’re going to find any brand or model that
you’re looking for, and at a good price, even with the shipping fees included.

Amy:
But also, if shopping online, especially if you’re an international visitor,

< voltar para o índice


169
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

you have to pay attention to shipping times. Because you need to make
sure that your item can be delivered during your stay in the U.S.

Lucas:
That’s true, and if you’re staying at a hotel, you need to make sure that
the hotel knows that you’re expecting a package to be delivered. And
chances are, your hotel is going to charge you a package delivery fee,
which could be a lot sometimes. So, make sure that you’re double-
checking with the hotel’s package delivery guidelines first.

[Amy is at a coffee shop with her tablet]


Amy:
So, now I’m going to teach you a little more about what I love to do, which
is online shopping! So, I’m going to introduce you to this website here
today, and there’s a bunch of popular categories on the homepage, like
deals and promotions, women’s fashion, men’s fashion, baby fashion...As
you use the site more, it’ll start to personalize suggestions for you. So, on
the homepage itself, they’ll start to be a section where it highlights items
of interest, and it’ll be based off of your prior search history. So, I’m going
to show how the website has all the categories arranged, and some of
them are electronics, luggage, pet supplies, pretty much anything you can
think of! But today, I am in the market for a new smartwatch!

The website’s brought up a couple of options that are the most popular,
and I’m going to pick the second one because I like the square design, and
when I click on it, it’s going to show me the entire description of the watch
from the manufacturer. And then, if you go down a little bit, the website
will also show you some competitive options that are similar to it! So, then
you can kind of compare and contrast and see which one you like most. I
still like this one, so now I’m going to go to the next section, which is really
important to me, reviews! So, this one has about 1,800 reviews, and this
is really important to me because when you read about the reviews, you
can see the real user experience and any issues that you’re concerned
about, you can look through the reviews to see if they’re addressed by the
other people. For me, I like this one, and I trust the reviews, so I’m going to
go ahead and add it to my cart! OK, so this part is really important.

Once you’ve added it to your cart, you’ll also want to consider the
shipping cost and the shipping time, whether you’re going to get it
in time or not. I’m going on a trip next week, so I want to make sure I
get it before I leave. So, I’m going to choose to pay a little bit extra for
shipping, so that I get it on Monday before I leave for my trip. OK, so I’m
all set for Monday delivery, I’ve added it to my cart, and I’ve checked out,
and my watch is on the way!

It’s been a long day! I hope you’ve enjoyed our insider tips for shopping
in L.A. and in the U.S.! Bye!

< voltar para o índice


170
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

COMPRANDO ON-LINE

[Amy e Lucas estão em uma rua movimentada]


Amy:
Você sabia que pesquisas recentes mostram que mais de 80% dos
americanos já fizeram alguma compra on-line? Isso não é só moda, é
uma mudança de comportamento. Todos os dias, mais e mais coisas são
vendidas on-line!

Lucas:
Nos EUA você pode comprar on-line praticamente qualquer coisa que
você pode comprar em uma loja física. Eletros, roupas, até mesmo
alimentos.

Amy:
E como tudo na vida, há prós e contras. On-line, você pode comparar
preços entre dezenas de lojas em minutos, em vez de gastar horas
percorrendo lojas físicas.

Lucas:
Além disso, outra coisa é que on-line você tem muito mais opções. Uma
loja física é limitada por seu espaço, logo, não terão um estoque grande.

Amy:
Falando em pontos negativos, quando você compra on-line, não tem
como você provar as coisas.

Lucas:
Isso é verdade, mas as chances são de você achar qualquer marca e
modelo que procura, com um bom preço, até mesmo incluindo o valor do
frete.

Amy:
Mas ao comprar on-line, principalmente se você for um visitante
internacional, você tem que prestar atenção aos prazos de entrega. Você
precisa ter certeza de que sua encomenda será entregue durante sua
estadia nos EUA.

Lucas:
É verdade, e se você estiver hospedado em um hotel, você precisa
garantir que o hotel saiba que você está esperando a entrega de um
pacote. E provavelmente, seu hotel cobrará uma taxa de recebimento,
o que, às vezes, pode sair caro. Então não se esqueça de verificar a
política de entrega do hotel previamente.

< voltar para o índice


171
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

[Amy está em um café com seu tablet]


Amy:
Agora, vou ensinar um pouco mais sobre algo que amo fazer, que
é comprar on-line! Vou apresentar esse site para vocês, e há várias
categorias populares na homepage, como por exemplo, promoções,
moda masculina, feminina e infantil. À medida que você usa o site,
ele vai personalizando sugestões para vocês. Na própria homepage,
surge uma seção onde artigos do seu interesse serão destacados com
base no seu histórico de pesquisas. Vou mostrar como o site organiza
as categorias, algumas delas são eletrônicos, malas para viagem,
acessórios para animais domésticos, praticamente qualquer coisa que
você possa imaginar! Mas hoje estou à procura de um smartwatch!

O site me mostrou algumas opções que são as mais populares, e vou


escolher a segunda porque gosto desse design quadrado; quando eu
clico nela, me mostram a descrição completa do relógio de acordo com
o fabricante. Então, descendo um pouco mais, o site também me mostra
opções competitivas, similares à minha escolha! Dessa forma você pode
compará-las e decidir de qual gosta mais. Eu ainda gosto da minha
escolha, então vou seguir para a próxima parte, que é muito importante
para mim, as avaliações! Este aqui tem cerca de 1.800 avaliações, o
que é muito importante para mim, porque quando você lê as avaliações,
você pode ver a verdadeira experiência do usuário, e se qualquer dúvida
te preocupa, você pode procurar se ela foi abordada por outras pessoas.
Eu gostei desse aqui e confio nas avaliações, então vou seguir em frente
e adicioná-lo ao meu carrinho. OK, essa parte é muito importante!

Uma vez que você tenha adicionado o artigo ao carrinho, deve levar
em conta o valor e tempo de entrega do frete, e se você vai recebê-lo
a tempo ou não. Vou viajar semana que vem, e quero garantir que ele
seja entregue antes da minha partida. Então, escolho pagar um pouco
mais no frete para que eu receba o pacote na segunda antes de viajar.
OK, tudo certo para a entrega na segunda, adicionei ao carrinho, fiz o
checkout e meu relógio está a caminho!

Foi um dia longo! Espero que você tenha gostado das nossas dicas para
fazer compras em Los Angeles e nos EUA! Tchau!

< voltar para o índice


172
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Online shopping is very practical, but it is relatively new:

Online shopping has been around since the 90s.


Compras pela internet existem desde os anos 90.

Everything has its pros and cons. Let’s see some advantages or upsides of shopping online:

You save time, since you can compare prices, products, and stores in minutes.
Você ganha tempo, já que pode comparar preços, produtos e lojas em minutos.

There will be a lot more options online, since a store is limited by physical space.
Vai haver muito mais opções on-line, uma vez que a loja é limitada pelo espaço físico.

Most products are cheaper online than at the store.


A maioria dos produtos on-line é mais barata do que na loja.

Now, let’s see some downsides or disadvantages of online shopping:

You have to check the exchange rates, since the purchase will be in dollars.
Você tem que verificar as taxas de câmbio, uma vez que a compra será em dólares.

Shipping fees may increase the cost of products.


As taxas de envio podem encarecer os produtos.

< voltar para o índice


173
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

If you buy something that is supposed to be delivered during the time you will be
abroad, you should consider the following:

Make sure it won’t be delivered after you have left and consider possible delays.
Certifique-se de que o produto não será entregue depois que você já tiver ido embora, e
considere possíveis atrasos.

Buy beforehand and compare the delivery dates with your trip’s so that the product
will have already been delivered when you arrive.
Compre com antecedência e compare as datas de entrega com as da sua viagem para
que o produto já tenha sido entregue quando você chegar.

In case you want to receive your delivery at the hotel you are staying,
here is what you should do:

Check the hotel policy for package-receiving fees.


Verifique a política de recebimento de pacotes do hotel.

Tell the hotel you’re expecting a package, or they won’t receive it.
Avise ao hotel que você está esperando um pacote, ou eles não vão recebê-lo.

Most shopping websites and apps are user-friendly. They do


anything to make it easier for people to buy, for example:

When you are looking for a product, they’ll show you


some filters to do your research.
Quando você estiver procurando um produto, eles vão te
mostrar filtros para você pesquisar.

< voltar para o índice


174
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Here is a list of common filters:

ONLINE SHOPPING APP AND WEBSITE FILTERS

Size Brand Price Gender


Tamanho Marca Preço Gênero

This is what you should do in order to have a better experience when shopping online:

After setting your filters, you’ll see the options that have the characteristics you’ve marked.
Depois que marcar seus filtros, você verá as opções que têm as características que você marcou.

By clicking on the product, you can see its description with details provided by the manufacturer.
Ao clicar no produto, você pode ver sua descrição com detalhes fornecidos pelo fabricante.

Some websites also have the option of comparing products.


Alguns sites também têm a opção de comparar produtos.

Since you can’t try on the items before you buy them, you can read what other
customers have to say to help you decide on your purchase:

Check the reviews to read other customers’ opinions.


Verifique os comentários para ler as opiniões de outros clientes.

Here are some examples of reviews you may find:

User-friendly operational system


Sistema operacional intuitivo / fácil de mexer

Fit for muddy soils


Próprio para terrenos com muita lama

< voltar para o índice


175
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And now, let’s look at the final steps of your online purchase:

After choosing the product, add it to the cart.


Depois de escolher o produto, adicione-o ao carrinho.

Don’t forget to check the shipping time to see if it fits your planning.
Não se esqueça de verificar o tempo de envio para ver se está de acordo
com os seus planos.

Remember to check the shipping fee and if the site is


charging you any tax, like the sales tax.
Lembre-se de conferir a taxa de envio e se o site cobrará
algum imposto, como o imposto sobre vendas.

Check your address and go for the checkout.


Verifique o seu endereço e siga para o checkout.

Wait for the order confirmation on your email


Aguarde a confirmação do pedido em seu e-mail.

In this chapter, you’ve learned the pros and cons of


shopping online at U.S. websites and apps. You’ve also
learned the main steps of buying online.

< voltar para o índice


176
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) Online shopping ( 7 ) Add to cart ( ) Imposto sobre ( ) Entrega


vendas
( 2 ) Delivery ( 8 ) Filters ( ) Marca
( ) Envio
( 3 ) Package ( 9 ) User-friendly ( ) Pacote
( ) Comparar produtos
( 4 ) Fees ( 10 ) Compare ( ) Intuitivo / Fácil de
products ( ) Compras pela mexer
( 5 ) Sales taxes
internet
( 11 ) Brand ( ) Gênero
( 6 ) Shipping
( ) Taxas
( 12 ) Gender ( )A
 dicionar ao
( ) Filtros carrinho

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) When you are looking for a product, they’ll show you some to do your research.
Quando você estiver procurando um produto, eles vão te mostrar filtros para você pesquisar.

b) has been around since the 90s.


Compras pela internet existem desde os anos 90.

c) There will be a lot more options online, since a store is limited by space.
Vai haver muito mais opções on-line, uma vez que a loja é limitada pelo espaço físico.

d) fees may increase the cost of products.


As taxas de envio podem encarecer os produtos.

e) Tell the hotel you’re expecting a , or they won’t receive it.


Avise ao hotel que você está esperando um pacote, ou eles não vão recebê-lo.

f) After choosing the product, add it to the .


Depois de escolher o produto, adicione-o ao carrinho.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


5/ 6 / 10 / 1 / 4 / 8 / a. filters d. shipping
2 / 11 / 3 / 9 / 12 / 7 b. Online shopping e. package
c. physical f. cart

< voltar para o índice


177
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we are going to talk about the imperative form, the passive
voice, and verbs in the past participle.
Let’s start with the imperative. We can use it to give instructions, advice,
orders, and tips. Have a look at the example:

IMPERATIVE

Check the hotel policy for package-receiving fees.


Verifique a política de recebimento de pacotes do hotel.

As you can see, the sentence starts with the verb check, without a subject before
it. In fact, there is a subject, you, but it is implicit, omitted. It happens because,
when we use the imperative, we are always talking directly to the person who is
supposed to do the action.
Let’s see the general structures for the imperative. In the affirmative form,
we will have:

IMPERATIVE
Affirmative Form

Main Verb (+ Complement)


Verbo Principal (+ Complemento)

The complement may or may not


IMPERATIVE
exist. It will depend on the context
Affirmative Form
and the verb. For example:

Go.
Vá.

< voltar para o índice


178
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

No complement is needed to convey


IMPERATIVE
the message here, so we only use the
Aff irmative Form
verb. Now, look at another sentence:

Go to the mall with your mom.


Vá ao shopping com sua mãe.

In this sentence, there is a complement, for it is important in the context.


Now, check out the structure of the negative form:

IMPERATIVE
Negative Form

Don’t + Main Verb (+ Complement)


Don’t + Verbo Principal (+ Complemento)

Notice that we just place don’t before the main verb. It is the same auxiliary
verb we use in the negative form of the simple present. And once again, we can
see that the complement may or not be used. Look at the next example:

IMPERATIVE
Negative Form

Don’t go.
Não vá.

No complement is needed here. We only use the verb to send the message.
Look at this one now:

IMPERATIVE
Negative Form

Don’t forget to check the delivery address.


Não se esqueça de verificar o endereço de entrega.

< voltar para o índice


179
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The complement is used here because it is important for the context;


also, the verb allows it.
There is no interrogative form in the imperative. It is also not possible
to turn it into the passive voice.
The passive voice is a construction that communicates the idea that
the action is more important than the doer, that is, the person
who performs the action. It is very used by the media, especially in
journalistic texts, which emphasize the facts.
It can also be used in situations in which the doer is unknown or
irrelevant. Let’s see some examples:

PASSIVE VOICE

Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th.


O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro.

The sentence is in the simple present. We know it due to the verb to be, is.
But if Valentine’s Day is celebrated on that specific day, it is obvious that someone celebrates
it. This sentence doesn’t mention this piece of information, though, because it is not important.
In this context, knowing what is celebrated and when is more important than learning who
celebrates it.
But we can mention the doer of the action without emphasizing it. Let’s see how we do it:

PASSIVE VOICE

Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th by the Americans.


O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro pelos americanos.

As you can see, we just add the preposition by followed by the agent of the
passive, in this case, the Americans. The agent of the passive indicates the one
who performs the action. So now we know who celebrates Valentine’s Day
because we have the agent of the passive at the end of the sentence.

< voltar para o índice


180
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now that we understand what the passive voice is used for, let’s see how it is
built. To do so, we must start with the structure of the active voice. Look:

ACTIVE VOICE

Subject + Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo + Complemento

Notice that the active voice is the sentence structured in a way that the subject or
the doer of the action is clearly mentioned.
As for the complement, it may be:

ACTIVE VOICE

Complement: (Object Of The Verb + Adverb Of Place + Adverb Of Time)


Complemento: (objeto do verbo + advérbio de lugar + advérbio de tempo)

Now, let’s look at a sentence to better understand it:

ACTIVE VOICE

Americans celebrate Valentine’s Day on February 14th.


subject main verb object adverb of time
(Simple Present)
Os americanos celebram o Dia de São Valentim em 14 de fevereiro.

As we’ve already seen, the basic structure of the active voice is subject + verb + complement.
Americans is the subject of the sentence, and it is followed by the verb celebrate, which is in the simple
present; in the complement, we have the object of the verb. This is very important, because a sentence can
only be turned into the passive voice if it has a subject and an object.
Sometimes the complement will have an adverb of place, which shows where the action happened, or an
adverb of time, which shows when the action happened.

< voltar para o índice


181
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Bear in mind that this structure may vary a little. This is just an example of the basic structure
to form many sentences in the active voice in English.
Now let’s see what happens when we turn this sentence into the passive voice. Check it out:

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

Americans celebrate Valentine’s Day on February 14th.


subject main verb object adverb of time
(Simple Present)
Os americanos celebram o Dia de São Valentim em 14 de fevereiro.

Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th (by the Americans).


subject be main verb adverb of time agent of the passive
(Past Participle)
O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro ( pelos americanos).

So, the object of the verb in the active voice becomes the subject in the passive voice.
Then we add the verb to be in the same verb form as the main verb in the active voice. The main verb in
the active voice is celebrate, conjugated in the simple present; so, we conjugate the verb to be in the simple
present as well. Here, it will be is.
The next step is to change the main verb in the active voice to the past participle. If it is a regular verb, it
will have the same form as the simple past. But if it is an irregular verb, it will depend on the verb. Celebrate
is regular, so it becomes celebrated.
Finally, we place the adverb of time, on February 14th. The sentence may finish there.

If you want, you can add the agent of the passive, which is the subject in the
active voice, introduced by the preposition by, in this case, by the Americans.
But, remember, this is optional information.
Let’s see other examples with the main verb in other verb forms. Look:

ACTIVE VOICE

Someone trained the salespeople to help you.


Alguém treinou os vendedores para te ajudar.

< voltar para o índice


182
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Knowing who trained the salespeople doesn’t make a difference.


What does matter is that they are trained. So, we will use the
passive voice. Let’s turn this sentence now. Check it out:

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

Someone trained the salespeople to help you.


subject main verb object

(Simple Past)

Alguém treinou os vendedores para te ajudar.

The salespeople were trained to help you.


subject to be main verb
(Past Participle)
Os vendedores foram treinados para ajudar você.

The object in the active voice becomes the subject, so we have The salespeople.
Then we add the verb to be in the same verb form as the main verb. In this case,
trained is in the simple past. So, the verb to be becomes were, because The
salespeople is equivalent to they.
The next step is to change the main verb to the past participle, trained. And the
rest is the complement.
Another example:

ACTIVE VOICE

The stores will offer many kinds of sales.


As lojas vão oferecer muitos tipos de promoção.

< voltar para o índice


183
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Again, it is not important to know who will offer many kinds of


sales. So, let’s use the passive voice:

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

The stores will offer many kinds of sales.


subject main verb object
(Will)
As lojas vão oferecer muitos tipos de promoções.

Many kinds of sales will be offered (by the stores).


subject to be main verb agent of the passive
(Past Perfect)
Muitos tipos de promoção serão oferecidos ( pelas lojas).

The object in the active voice becomes the subject, so we have Many kinds of sales.
Then we must add the verb to be in the same verb form as the main verb. The main verb in
this case is offer, and it is in the future with will; so, the verb to be has to be conjugated in the
future: will be.
Next, we change the main verb, offer, to the past participle, offered. The agent of the
passive, the stores, is optional. We will include it whenever it is important to mention who is
performing the action.
Look at this next one now:

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

The stores are warning the customers to mind their belongings at all times.
subject main verb object
(Present Continuous)
As lojas estão avisando aos clientes para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.

Customers are being warned to mind their belongings at all times.


subject to be main verb
(Past Perfect)
Os clientes estão sendo avisados para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.

< voltar para o índice


184
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Customers, which is the object of the verb in the active voice, becomes the subject of the
passive voice.
Then we use the verb to be in the present continuous because the main verb in the active
voice, warn, is in the present continuous. But the verb to be is used twice in this case: first, as
the auxiliary verb in the present, is; second, as the main verb in the -ING form, being.
Next, the main verb of the active voice in the past participle, warned.
One last example:

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

The manufacturer might not offer international warranty.


subject main verb object
( might)
O fabricante pode não oferecer garantia internacional.

International warranty might not be offered by the manufacturer.


subject to be main verb agent of the passive
(Past Perfect)
A garantia internacional pode não ser oferecida pelo fabricante.

The subject now will be international warranty, followed by might not be, since
the main verb in the active voice is might not offer. Then we add the main verb
in the past participle, offered.

In this chapter, we’ve seen the imperative, the passive voice, and verbs
in the past participle. If you want to learn more about these topics,
look at the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Imperative Page 204 w


Irregular Verbs – Past Participle Page 215 w
Passive Voice Page 236 w

< voltar para o índice


185
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Write AV if the sentence is in the active voice, and PV if it’s in the passive voice.

a) Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th. ( )


O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro

b) Someone trained the salespeople to help you. ( )


Alguém treinou os vendedores para te ajudar.

c) The stores will offer many kinds of sales. ( )


As lojas vão oferecer muitos tipos de promoção.

d) Many kinds of sales will be offered (by the stores). ( )


Muitos tipos de promoção serão oferecidos ( pelas lojas).

e) The stores are warning the customers to mind their belongings at all times. ( )
As lojas estão avisando aos clientes para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.

f) International warranty might not be offered by the manufacturer. ( )


A garantia internacional pode não ser oferecida pelo fabricante.

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.

a) to check the delivery address.


Não se esqueça de verificar o endereço de entrega.

b) Valentine’s Day on February 14th by the Americans.


O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro pelos americanos.

c) The salespeople to help you.


Os vendedores foram treinados para ajudar você.

d) Many kinds of sales (by the stores).


Muitos tipos de promoção serão oferecidos ( pelas lojas).

< voltar para o índice


186
Chapter 9 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

e) Customers to mind their belongings at all times.


Os clientes estão sendo avisados para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.

f) International warranty by the manufacturer.


A garantia internacional pode não ser oferecida pelo fabricante.

Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers


a. PV a. Do not (Don’t) forget
b. AV b. is celebrated
c. AV c. were trained
d. PV d. will be offered
e. AV e. are being warned
f. PV f. might not be offered / may not be offered

< voltar para o índice


187
Grammar Guide.
Adverbs of Frequency
Adverbs are words used to modify a verb, an adjective, another adverb, phrases,
or sentences. They answer questions such as where, when, for how long, how
likely, or to what degree, and are classified as adverbs of manner, place, time,
frequency, certainty, and degree.
Adverbs of frequency are the ones used to express how often we do things.
Take a look at the most common ones.

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY


Commonly used

100% Always
Sempre

Usually/Typically
Geralmente

Often
Frequentemente

Sometimes
Às vezes / Algumas vezes

Hardly / Hardly ever


Dificilmente / Quase nunca

0% Never
Nunca

< voltar para o índice


189
Regarding the structure, the general rule is that the adverb comes before the main verb.

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY


Position of the Adverb – General Rule

Do you usually go to the gym in the morning?


Você geralmente vai à academia de manhã?
(The adverb “usually” is placed before the main verb “go.”)

You can’t always get what you want.


Você nem sempre consegue o que deseja.
(The adverb “always” is placed before the main verb “get.”)

However, there are exceptions to the general rule. When the verb
to be is the main verb in the simple present or the simple past, the
adverb is placed after the verb to be.

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY


Position of the Adverb – Verb to be: Main Verb

She is always on time.


Ela é sempre pontual.
(Verb to be = main verb; The adverb “always” is placed after it).

Pay attention to this. When the verb to be is an auxiliary verb, the position follows
the general rule and the adverb is placed before the main verb.

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY


Position of the Adverb – Verb to be: Auxiliary Verb

I am always looking for discounts.


Eu estou sempre procurando descontos.
(Verb to be = auxiliary verb; Main verb = “looking”; The adverb “always” is
placed before the main verb.)

< voltar para o índice


190
Another exception is the adverb sometimes. This adverb can be placed before the subject,
before the main verb, or after the main verb.

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY


Position of the Adverb – Verb to be: Auxiliary Verb

Sometimes we hike. / We sometimes hike. / We hike sometimes.


Às vezes caminhamos. / Nós às vezes caminhamos. / Nós caminhamos às vezes.
(The adverb “sometimes” can go before the subject, before the main verb,
or after the main verb.)

Besides the most common adverbs we’ve seen, there are some that express a definite frequency and
are most of the time placed at the end of the sentence. These adverbs usually bring us information about
scheduled and planned events.

ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY


Definite Frequency

We have exams monthly. I check the stock market daily.


Nós fazemos provas mensalmente. Eu verifico o mercado de ações diariamente.
(It means that every month we have exams.) (I check the stock market every day.)

The system is updated hourly.


O sistema é atualizado a cada hora.
(The system is updated every hour.)

An adverbial phrase expressing


ADVERBS OF FRE QUENCY
frequency can also be used to tell
Definite Frequency
us how often something happens.
An adverbial phrase is a group of
words that function as an adverb Once a day Twice a week
in a sentence. They are used to add Uma vez por dia Duas vezes por semana
meaning to a verb, an adjective, or
another adverb.
Three times a month Ten times a year
Três vezes por mês Dez vezes por ano

< voltar para o índice


191
Check the use of adverbial phrases in the context. In terms of structure, notice that the
words combined are phrases because they form a unit that has a particular function in the
sentence. These phrases refer to the verbs to show us how often things happen. As they add
information to verbs, they are called adverbial phrases of frequency.

ADVERBIAL PHRASES OF FRE QUENCY

Sandra has Pilates classes three times a week.


A Sandra tem aula de pilates três vezes na semana.
(Sandra has Pilates classes three days in a week.)

I take a vacation twice a year.


Eu tiro férias duas vezes por ano.
(It means that I have two vacation periods per year.)

Some expressions are also used tell us how often things happen.

EXPRESSIONS

Once in a blue moon, I wash my car.


Uma vez ou outra, eu lavo o meu carro.
(“Once in a blue moon” means that something is rare, so, I rarely wash my car.)

Every now and then we visit our friends.


De vez em quando nós visitamos nossos amigos.
(“Every now and then” means that it is not all the time, but it is not rare either).

Now you know what an adverb is, as well as when and how we use adverbs of frequency and
adverbial phrases to say how often we do things or how often things happen.

< voltar para o índice


192
Be +
Going To (Future)
The structure be + going to is often used to refer to the future.
When the structure be + going to refers to the future, the verb to be is used in
the simple present followed by going to and a verb in its base form.

BE + GOING TO: FUTURE

Be (Simple Present) + Going to + Verb (Base Form)

I’m going to travel next week.


Eu vou viajar semana que vem.

We use be + going to when we want to talk about future events or actions that were planned
beforehand. That is, when we use this structure, we may want to emphasize the fact that we
have been planning this future event.

BE + GOING TO

We are going to buy a new house.


Nós vamos comprar uma casa nova.
(The people who made this decision had to reach an agreement to decide
when, why, and how to do that.)

I am going to Mexico on my next vacation.


Eu estou indo para o México nas minhas próximas férias.
(I had to decide the destination, choose the dates, book a flight, a hotel, a car, etc.)

< voltar para o índice


193
Be + going to is also used to talk about predictions based on evidence. That is, according to
the speaker’s point of view, there’s evidence that this future event is going to happen.

BE + GOING TO

It’s really cloudy. It is going to rain.


Está muito nublado. Vai chover.
(The cloudy sky is an evidence.)

It’s the second time you arrive late. You are going to get into serious trouble.
É a segunda vez que você chega atrasado. Você vai ter sérios problemas.
(From the speaker’s knowledge of the facts, arriving late again is
evidence that you are getting into trouble.)

Another use of be + going to is to insist that people do or do not things. This is a


way to add emphasis to the fact that something is obligatory. Check some examples.

BE + GOING TO

You are going to wash your hand before you sit at the table.
Você vai lavar a mão antes de se sentar à mesa.
(You are telling what the person has to do, emphasizing the person has to
wash their hands first).

You are not going to play until you finish your homework.
Você não vai brincar até terminar a sua lição de casa.
(You are saying what is not going to happen—play—if something isn’t done
before—the homework.)

In informal speech, you can replace going to with gonna.

BE + GOING TO

I’m gonna talk to her.


Eu vou falar com ela.
(gonna = going to)

< voltar para o índice


194
Now, analyze the use of will and be + going to when referring to the future.
Mostly, you can use them interchangeably. The differences in use may be very
subtle and have a lot to do with the speaker’s intention. That happens because
choosing between will or be + going to depends on the speaker’s perspective
and interpretation of that future event. In some contexts, one structure might
sound more natural than the other.

Imagine this situation. There is a man named John


WILL VS. BE + GOING TO
who decides to propose to his girlfriend, Julia. In this
case, will is preferred.

Julia, will you marry me?


Julia, você quer se casar comigo?

There are some reasons why asking this question with will sounds more natural
and more appropriate than with going to.

WILL VS. BE + GOING TO

First, the modal verb will convey an idea of willingness, that is, something
you want to do or want it to happen.
Primeiro, o modal verb will traz uma ideia de vontade, ou seja, algo que você
quer fazer ou quer que aconteça.

Second, John expects Julia to make an instant decision. That is, John may
have planned to propose to Julia, but Julia is listening to that for the first
time, and she’s expected to make a decision about that future event at the
moment of the conversation.
Segundo, o John espera que a Julia tome uma decisão imediata. Ou seja, o
John pode ter planejado pedir a Julia em casamento, mas a Julia está ouvindo
a proposta pela primeira vez, e espera-se que ela tome uma decisão sobre
esse evento futuro no momento da conversa.

< voltar para o índice


195
Now imagine that Julia accepts John’s proposal. They schedule a date
and start to plan the wedding. Julia goes to a bridal shop to choose the
dress and the salesperson may ask her about the wedding.
In this situation, be + going to sounds more natural and even more
appropriate since Julia and John have been planning this future
event beforehand.

WILL VS. BE + GOING TO

Salesperson: When is the wedding?


Vendedor: Quando é o casamento?

Julia: It’s going to be in June.


Julia: Vai ser em junho.

Now you know more about the structure be + going to, its uses, and some
differences between will and be + going to.

< voltar para o índice


196
Conditionals
Conditionals are sentences that talk about known facts or hypothetical
situations and their consequences. In these sentences, something must happen
first so that another thing happens. Conditionals usually contain an if-clause,
which is the conditional clause, and another cause stating the consequence.
When the clause that gives us one condition, that is, the if-clause, comes first, we
place a comma right after it. But the if-clause can also come after the main clause;
then, there is no comma.

CONDITIONALS

If I had money, I would travel the world.


Se eu tivesse dinheiro, eu viajaria pelo mundo.
(The condition is “If I had money” and the
consequence is “I would travel the world.”)
(A condição é “Se eu tivesse dinheiro”, e a
consequência é “eu viajaria pelo mundo”.)

I’ll go to the beach tomorrow if the weather is good.


Eu irei à praia amanhã se o tempo estiver bom.
(The consequence is “I’ll go to the beach tomorrow”
and the condition is “if the weather is good.”)
(A consequência é “Eu irei à praia amanhã”,
e a condição é “se o tempo estiver bom”.)

There are four types of conditional sentences. Each type of conditional expresses
a degree of probability for a situation to happen. We call them zero conditional,
first conditional, second conditional, and third conditional.
Zero conditionals are used to talk about general truths, which means one thing
will always cause a specific consequence. The verb form used in both clauses is
the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


197
ZERO CONDITIONAL
General Truths

If Clause Main Clause


If (When) + Simple Present Simple Present

If you cool water to zero degrees, it turns into ice.


Se você resfriar a água a zero grau, ela vira gelo.
(It is a scientific fact; so, the result of the conditional clause will always be true.)
(É um fato científico; portanto, o resultado da oração condicional será sempre
verdadeiro.)

When you smoke, you harm your health.


Quando você fuma, você prejudica a sua saúde.
(This consequence is also true, regardless of the circumstances.)
(Essa consequência também é verdadeira, independente das circunstâncias.)

The first conditional is used when the result is likely to happen. In this conditional, we use the if-clause in
the simple present and the main clause with will or another modal verb used to express future ideas.

FIRST CONDITIONAL
Likely future results

If-clause Main Clause


If + Present Will/May/Can/Could/Should + Infinitive

If you study, you will do well on the exam. If you study, you may do well on the exam.
Se você estudar, você se sairá bem na prova. Se você estudar, você pode se sair bem na prova.
(A future situation we believe to be possible). Se você estudar, pode ser que se saia bem na prova.
(You are likely to reach the outcome).

If you go on a diet, you’ll lose weight. If you go on a diet, you can lose weight.
Se você fizer uma dieta, perderá peso. Se você fizer uma dieta, você pode perder peso.
(A future situation we believe to be possible). (If you fulfil the condition, it’s a possible future).

< voltar para o índice


198
The second conditionals is used to talk about unrealistic consequences or things that are not
likely to happen. For this conditional, we use the If-clause in the simple past and the main clause
frequently with the modal verb would. The main sentence expresses the unlikelihood that the
result will actually happen, so the modal verbs could and might are also used.

SE COND CONDITIONAL
Unrealistic Consequence

If-clause Main Clause


If + Past Would/Could/Might + Infinitive

If I had a billion dollars, I would go to Mars.


If I had a billion dollars, I could go to Mars.
Se eu tivesse um bilhão de dólares, eu iria para Marte.
Se eu tivesse um bilhão de dólares, eu poderia ir para Marte.

If I were you, I would call her.


Se eu fosse você, eu ligaria para ela.

The third conditional is used to say that if something had happened in the past, the present
would be different. These sentences express a condition that was likely to happen, but it
didn’t, and it might imply an idea of regret.
In this conditional, the if-clause is in the past perfect and the main clause is formed by a
modal verb that expresses past probability or hypothetical situations in the past, such as
could, should, and would + have + the main verb in the past participle.

THIRD CONDITIONAL
A condition that was likely to happen, but didn’t

If-clause Main Clause


If + Past Perfect Modal + Perfect

If you had told me you needed help, I could have helped you.
Se você tivesse me dito que precisava de ajuda, eu poderia ter lhe ajudado.

If you had left home earlier, you would have arrived on time.
Se você tivesse saído de casa mais cedo, teria chegado no horário.

Now you know what a conditional is and the most common types of
conditionals as well as the structures and use.

< voltar para o índice


199
Contraction of Verbs
Contractions are shorter forms of a word, syllable, or word group. They are very
common in spoken language and informal writing.
In English, two of the most frequent contractions are with the verbs to be and to
have in the present with subject pronouns.
It’s important to pay special attention to the contraction of these verbs in the third
person singular—he, she and it. They have the same contracted form, and only the
context is going to make clear whether ’s stands for the contraction of the verb to be
or the verb to have.

CONTRACTIONS OF VERBS
Present

Verb to be Verb to have

I’m I’ve
(I + am) (I + Have)

You’re/We’re/They’re You’ve /We’ve/They’ve


(You + are / We + are / They + are) (You + have / We + have / They + have)

He’s/She’s/It’s He’s/She’s/It’s
(He + is / She + is / It + is) (He + has / She + has / It + has)

The verb to be in the present can be contracted with pronouns or nouns either
when it’s the main verb of a sentence or the auxiliary.

< voltar para o índice


200
CONTRACTIONS
Nouns/Pronouns + Verb To Be (in the present)

Verb To Be as the Main Verb Verb To Be as the Auxiliary Verb

I’m happy for you. I’m going to tell mom the good news.
Estou feliz por você. Eu vou contar para a mamãe as boas notícias.
(I’m = Pronoun + Verb To Be) (I’m = Pronoun + Verb To Be)

Sheila’s here. She’s staying at the Central Hotel.


Sheila está aqui. Ela está hospedada no Central Hotel.
(Sheila’s = Noun + Verb To Be) (She’s = Pronoun + Verb To Be)

For all other verbs that are not the verb to be in the present, the pronouns and
nouns will only be contracted with auxiliary verbs.
Once again, two different verbs will have the same contracted form—the verb
to have as an auxiliary verb in its past form had and the modal verb would. Both
verbs are contracted as ’d.

CONTRACTIONS
Nouns/Pronouns + Auxiliary Verbs

I’ve told you.


Eu te disse.
(I’ve = Pronoun + Verb To Have)

The verb “to have” functions as an auxiliary.


O verbo to have funciona como um verbo auxiliar.

We’ll be happy to see you.


Nós ficaremos felizes em vê-lo.
(we’ll = Pronoun + Modal Verb Will)

The modal verb “will” functions as an auxiliary.


O modal verb will funciona como um verbo auxiliar.

< voltar para o índice


201
I’d like to talk to you.
Eu gostaria de conversar com você.
(I’d = Pronoun + Modal Verb Would)

The modal verb “would” functions as an auxiliary.


O modal verb would funciona como um verbo auxiliar.

I’d already talked to you about it.


Eu já tinha falado com você sobre isso.
(I’d = Pronoun + Verb To Have in the Past “had”)

The verb “to have” functions as an auxiliary in its past form.


O verbo to have tem a função de um verbo auxiliar na sua forma passada.

In negative statements, auxiliary verbs can also be contracted with the negative
particle not.
Basically, all auxiliary verbs in English can contract with not; the only exception is the
first person singular of the verb to be in the simple present, am, which does not.

CONTRACTIONS
Auxiliaries in negative sentences

Auxiliary Verbs Modal Auxiliaries

isn’t is + not won’t will + not


aren’t are + not can’t can + not
wasn’t was + not couldn’t could + not
weren’t were + not shouldn’t should + not
don’t do + not mustn’t must + not
doesn’t does + not wouldn’t would + not
didn’t did + not won’t will + not
haven’t have + not
hasn’t has + not
hadn’t had + not

< voltar para o índice


202
Besides contracting with nouns, pronouns, and the negative particle
not, the short form ’s (= is) can also be contracted with question
words and the adverbs here and there, as we can see in the following
examples.

CONTRACTIONS
Questions Words / Here / There

What’s up?
E aí?
(The question word “what” + the verb “is” = What’s)

Here’s your document.


Aqui está o seu documento.
(Here + the verb “is” = Here’s)

There’s a problem.
Há um problema.
(There + the verb “is” = There’s)

There are some special cases with the verbs to go, to want, and to get. Some forms of these verbs can
contract with the preposition to. It is mostly a feature of spoken language, and it is considered very informal.

CONTRACTIONS OF VERBS
Other Verbs – Special Cases

Going + to = Gonna Want + to = Wanna Got + to = Gotta

I’m gonna talk to her. I wanna be rich. You gotta believe me.
I’m going to talk to her. I want to be rich. You (have) got to believe me.
Eu vou falar com ela. Eu quero ser rico. Você tem que acreditar em mim.

Now you know a bit more about contractions of verbs.

< voltar para o índice


203
Imperative
The imperative form is used to tell people what to do and for this reason it does not have an
interrogative form. The Imperative is only used in the affirmative and negative forms.

IMPERATIVE FORM
Structure

Affirmative Form
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Go there.
Vá lá.

Negative Form
Auxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Don’t come here.


Não venha aqui.

In English, the imperative performs many functions. It can be used to give orders
or to demand something, to instruct, to give advice or recommendation, or to
encourage someone.

IMPERATIVE FORM
Functions

1. Order; demand

Open your book. Don’t get in.


Abra o seu livro. Não entre.

2. Instructions

Mix the ingredients and add salt. Don’t put too much salt.
Misture os ingredientes e adicione sal. Não coloque muito sal.

< voltar para o índice


204
3. Advice, suggestions

Have a cup of tea and rest. Don’t forget to take your coat.
Tome uma xícara de chá e descanse. Não se esqueça de levar seu casaco.

4. Requests; favors

Bring it to me, please. Don’t tell John, please.


Traga isso para mim, por favor. Não conte para o John, por favor.

5. Encouragement

Try again! You can do it. Don’t give up. You can do it.
Tente novamente! Você consegue. Não desista. Você consegue.

Imperative sentences are always addressed to the listener or listeners. So, the subject is always
in the second person, which is “you,” in the singular or plural forms. For that reason, in most
imperative sentences, the subject is omitted.
However, the subject can be included in imperative sentences to add emphasis to the action. In
such cases, it will be placed before the main verb, in both affirmative and negative sentences.

IMPERATIVE FORM
Using the Subject to Add Emphasis

Affirmative Form
Subject (second person) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

You sit down now.


Sente-se agora.

Negative Form
Auxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Subject (second person) +
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Don’t you lie to me.


Não minta para mim.

< voltar para o índice


205
In English, we can only use the imperative form to address the person or people to whom we are talking.
But if we want to make suggestions or requests in the first person, we can use the verb let in the imperative.
We’ll use the verb let in the imperative form, the object pronoun for the first person, which is either “me”
or “us,” a verb in the infinitive form (without to), and the complement.

INDEFINITE ARTICLE
Making Suggestions or Requests in the First Person

Let (Imperative Form) + Object Pronoun in the First Person ( me/us) +


Verb in the Infinitive Form (without “to”)

Let me see.
Deixe-me ver.

Let me help you.


Deixe-me ajudá-lo.

Let’s meet tomorrow. (Let’s Let us)


Vamos nos encontrar amanhã.

Let’s watch a movie tonight. (Let’s Let us)


Vamos assistir a um filme hoje à noite.

We can use the same structure to make suggestions or requests for a third person.
To do that, we just have to use the object pronouns in the third person.

IMPERATIVE FORM
Making Suggestions or Requests for a Third Person

Let (Imperative Form) + Object Pronoun in the Third Person (him/her/it/them) +


Verb in the Infinitive Form (without “to”)

Let it go.
Deixe isso para lá.

Let him stay.


Deixe-o ficar.

Let them talk.


Deixe-os falar.

And this is how we use the imperative in English.

< voltar para o índice


206
Impersonal And
Indefinite Pronouns
Pronouns are words that can take the place of a noun, a noun phrase, and noun clauses.
They can have different uses: a specific use, and a more generic use.
When pronouns are specific, we know exactly to whom or what they are referring. As for the
generic use of pronouns, we cannot specify to whom or to what they are referring.

PRONOUNS

Specific
Refer to definite people, things, or places.
Se referem a pessoas, coisas ou lugares definidos.

Generic / Non-specific
Do not refer to a specific person, thing, or place. They are either generic or indefinite.
Não se referem a uma pessoa, coisa ou lugar específicos. Eles são genéricos ou indefinidos.

The pronoun it, for example, may refer to a specific thing, animal, or place, but it can also have a
non-specific use when it does not refer to a person, or thing, or to any other part of the sentence.
In such cases, the pronoun it is often referred to as impersonal. Check some examples.

PRONOUN – IT
Specific and Generic Uses

Specific

This purse is beautiful. Too bad it is too expensive.


Essa bolsa é linda. Pena que é muito cara.
(it = this purse)

Look at this fish. It changes color.


Olhe para esse peixe. Ele muda de cor.
(It = this fish)

< voltar para o índice


207
Non-specific

It’s good to see you!


É bom te ver!
(It accomplishes the function of the subject of the sentence.
It does not refer to a person or thing.)

It’s a pleasure to meet you.


É um prazer conhecê-lo.
(It makes no reference to a person, thing, or to any part of the sentence.)

Other pronouns such as you, they, he, or she can also have generic uses when
they refer to people in general. Check some examples so you can understand
it better.

PRONOUNS – HE , SHE , AND THE Y


Specific and Generic Uses

Specific

If John wants to arrive on time, he should leave now.


Se o John quiser chegar a tempo, ele deveria sair agora.
(He replaces John. It has a definite and specific function.)

Generic

If a student wants to pass the exam, he has to study.


Se um aluno quer passar na prova, ele tem que estudar.
(He refers to a student in a generic way.)

If a student wants to pass the exam, he or she has to study.


Se um aluno/a quer passar na prova, ele ou ela tem que estudar.
(It’s a generic statement, and it avoids using just the
masculine pronoun to refer to both genders.)

If a person wants to pass the exam, they have to study.


Se uma pessoa quer passar na prova, ele/ela tem que estudar.
(This is the singular they. In this generic use, they replaces
he or she, and it refers to a person.)

< voltar para o índice


208
The second person pronoun, you, can also be used in a generic way. But we’ll have to analyze
the context in order to distinguish how it is being used.

PRONOUN – YOU
Specific and Generic Uses

Specific

Mark, you haven’t been studying hard enough. If you want to pass, you must study.
Mark, você não tem estudado o bastante. Se você quer passar, tem que estudar.
(you = Mark)

Non-specific

Everyone knows that graduating from college takes time and effort.
If you want to pass, you must study.
Todo mundo sabe que para se formar na faculdade é preciso tempo e esforço.
Se você quer passar, tem que estudar.
(you = anyone who wants to pass)

To refer to the singular, we can also use the pronoun one. One is used to talk
about people in general, and it can be replaced by the pronoun you with generic
meaning.

GENERIC USES OF PRONOUNS

One cannot learn a language without practicing.


Não se pode aprender um idioma sem praticar.
(One = a person).

You cannot learn a language without practicing.


Você não pode aprender um idioma sem praticar.
(You = people in general).

< voltar para o índice


209
There is a group of pronouns, indefinite pronouns, that will always be used
in place of a noun without specifying a particular person or thing that is being
represented. These pronouns are always used to refer to people, places, and
things in a general way.
If we want to refer to a group of people, we can use some variations ending
in -ONE, such as everyone, someone, anyone, or no one, or with the same
meaning, using the suffix -BODY. They all refer to people.
We’ll use the suffix -THING, if we want to refer to things in general, be them
concrete or abstract.

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

People Things

Nobody / No one Nothing


Ninguém Nada

Somebody/Someone Something
Alguém Alguma coisa

Anybody/Anyone Anything
Qualquer pessoa Qualquer coisa

Everybody/Everyone Everything
Todo mundo Tudo

Check some examples of the use of indefinite pronouns.

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

No one should ever die of starvation. Can someone tell me the truth?
Nobody should ever die of starvation Can somebody tell me the truth?
Ninguém deveria morrer de fome. Alguém pode me dizer a verdade?
(No one / Nobody = Not even one person) (Someone/Somebody = an unspecified
person, some person)

I’ve never met anyone as kind as you.


I’ve never met anybody as kind as you.
Everyone was excited about the game.
Eu nunca conheci alguém /
Everybody was excited about the game.
uma pessoa tão gentil quanto você.
Todos ficaram entusiasmados com o jogo.
(Anyone/Anybody = one person,
(Everyone/Everybody = every individual)
two or more people)

< voltar para o índice


210
It’s important to notice, though, that these pronouns usually refer to a group
of people or things—or, in their negative forms, to the absence of a group
of people or things—, but they will always require a verb in the third person
singular.

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

Everybody loves Mary.


Todo mundo ama a Mary.
(The verb to love is used in the third person singular, loves.)

Thank you for dinner. Everything was delicious.


Obrigado pelo jantar. Tudo estava delicioso.
(Everything means all the dishes. But the verb to be
is used in the third person singular, was.)

Everybody is happy. They are singing, laughing, and dancing.


Todo mundo está feliz. Eles estão cantando, rindo e dançando
(Everybody means all the people. But the verb to be is used
in the third person singular, is.)

And this how you use pronouns in specific and generic ways.

< voltar para o índice


211
Irregular Verbs Past
Irregular verbs are those that do not follow the rule for regular verbs. These
verbs have different forms in the past that do not follow specific spelling rules.
Some will have a different ending, some will have a vowel change, some will
become totally different from their base form, and some won’t change at all.
The verb to read has no change in spelling. However, the pronunciation of the
central vowel will be different.

IRRE GUL AR VERBS


No Change

To cut (cut) To let (let)


cortar deixar, permitir

To hurt (hurt) To put ( put)


machucar botar, colocar

Another group of irregular verbs will change the stressed vowel in their past forms.

RE GUL AR VERBS
Change the Stressed Vowel

To begin (began) To give (gave) To run (ran)


começar dar correr

To come (came) To know (knew) To see (saw)


vir saber, conhecer ver

< voltar para o índice


212
Still in the group of irregular verbs that undergo changes in the stressed vowel, there is a very
large group of verbs that will change the vowels from the base form to the vowel o, which is
sometimes spelled “ou.” In some verbs from this group this will be the only change. Others
undergo some additional changes.

IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Change the Stressed Vowel to “O” or “OU”

To break (broke) To bring (brought) To buy (bought)


quebrar trazer comprar

To drive (drove) To get (got) To speak (spoke)


dirigir pegar, conseguir falar

To take (took) To tell (told) To think (thought)


levar, tomar contar, dizer pensar, achar

To understand (understood) To win (won) To write (wrote)


entender, compreender ganhar escrever

Another group of irregular verbs will be altered in order to have the final syllable of their past
forms sounding as a D. Among the most frequent verbs, we can highlight three.
These widely used verbs are: to have, in the past had, to make, in the past made, and to say,
in the past said (in this case we dropped the -Y and added –ID).

IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Change to end in a “D” Sound

To have (had) To make (made) To say (said)


ter fazer falar, dizer

< voltar para o índice


213
There’s also a group that will vary to have the ending -T in the simple past.
In addition to the ending, another feature of this group of verbs is that the stressed vowel in the base form,
pronounced as a long vowel, in the past becomes a short vowel. For example, the verb to feel. The stressed
vowel has a long sound. But, in the past, it’s felt, which is a short vowel, and it ends in -T.
Check out a group of verbs that undergo similar changes:

RE GUL AR VERBS
Change the Stressed Vowel

To feel (felt) To keep (kept) To leave (left)


sentir manter, permancer sair, partir, deixar

To meet (met) To lose (lost) To leave (left)


encontrar, conhecer perder sair, partir, deixar

There are three very frequent verbs in English that do not fit any of the aforementioned groups,
which are the verbs to be, to go, and to do.

IRRE GUL AR VERBS


No pattern

To do (did) To go (went) To be (was/were)


fazer ir ser, estar

The verb to be is the most irregular verb in English. In the past, it is the only verb to have two
different conjugations: was and were. Look at the conjugation table of the verb to be in the past.

IRRE GUL AR VERBS


To Be (ser/estar)

Subject Pronoun Verb To Be (Simple Past)


I/he/she/it was
you/we/they were

And now you know some irregular verbs in the past.

< voltar para o índice


214
Irregular Verbs -
Past Participle
In this grammar guide, we’ll tackle irregular verbs in the past participle. It’s important to
highlight that, among the most commonly used verbs in English, there are only about 200
irregular verbs. That means that most of the verbs are regular.
But although there aren’t many irregular verbs in English, it’s fair to say that they deserve some
special attention, since there is not a pattern that applies to all of them.
In English, the past participle is used with some perfect forms in the active voice, namely the
present perfect, the past perfect, the future perfect, and modal verbs + perfect, and it is also
used with all the verb forms in the passive voice.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Perfect Forms

I’ve seen so many beautiful places. I couldn’t have chosen just one to write about.
Eu vi muitos lugares bonitos. Eu não poderia ter escolhido escrever sobre apenas um.
(seen = past participle of to see; chosen = past participle of to choose)

Check some examples in the passive voice:

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Passive Voice

The tradition was kept by many people around the country.


A tradição foi mantida por muitas pessoas ao redor do país.

She was chosen as the employee of the month.


Ela foi escolhida a funcionária do mês.

If you want to learn more about the perfect forms or the passive voice, check the grammar
guides on these topics. They both use the past participle, and that’s why it’s important to focus
on this topic.

< voltar para o índice


215
The regular verbs in the past participle follow the same pattern of the past forms.
As for the irregular verbs, some of them will keep the same form as the one used for
the past, some of them will keep the base form—although they might differ from the
past form—and others will have a totally different form.
In the first case, the verbs have the same form for the past and past participle
grouped by phonological patterns.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Keep Kept Kept


Manter

Sleep Slept Slept


Dormir

Meet Met Met


Encontrar, conhecer

The same rule applies for the verbs to mean, to read, and to hear, for example.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Mean Meant Meant


Significar

Read Read Read


Ler

Hear Heard Heard


Ouvir

< voltar para o índice


216
In the same group, we’ll find the verbs to find, to bring, and to think, which will have
the same form in the past and in the past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Find Found Found


Encontrar, achar

Bring Brought Brought


Trazer

Think Thought Thought


Pensar, achar

Verbs ending in -ELL change to -OLD and keep the same form in the
past and past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Sell Sold Sold


Vender

Tell Told Told


Dizer, contar

< voltar para o índice


217
There is a group of verbs that do not change their base forms in the past.
This group will also keep the same form in the past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Keep the same form

Base Form Past Past Participle

Bet Bet Bet


Apostar

Cut Cut Cut


Cortar

Hurt Hurt Hurt


Machucar

Another group of verbs will undergo some changes in their past forms, but their past
participle forms are spelled and pronounced just like their base forms.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Base form = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Come Came Come


Vir

Run Ran Run


Correr

Become Became Become


Tornar-se

< voltar para o índice


218
Moreover, there is a group of verbs that have three different forms. Check some examples grouped
according to phonological patterns as we did with the first group.
To make the past participle of some verbs, we’ll repeat the same form of the past and add -N or -EN.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past Participle = Past + -N or -EN

Base Form Past Past Participle

Break Broke Broken


Quebrar

Choose Chose Chosen


Escolher

Get Got Gotten


Pegar, conseguir

For some others, we’ll add -N or -EN to the base form to make the past participle,
and they may change the pronunciation of the stressed vowel.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Base form = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Drive Drove Driven


Dirigir

Ride Rode Ridden


Montar

Write Wrote Written


Escrever

Eat Ate Eaten


Comer

Fall Fell Fallen


Cair

Forbid Forbade Forbidden


Proibir

< voltar para o índice


219
Some verbs that end in -EW in the past, will have their endings changed
to -OWN in the past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past (-EW) = Past Participle (-OWN)

Base Form Past Past Participle

Grow Grew Grown


Crescer

Know Knew Known


Saber, conhecer

Fly Flew Flown


Voar

The highly frequent verbs to be, to do, and to go also have different forms.
Check it on the table.
Notice that there are two different past forms for the verb to be, but there
is only one for the past participle, which is been.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS

Base Form Past Past Participle

Be Was/Were Been
Ser, estar

Do Did Done
Fazer

Go Went Gone
Ir

And now you know the past participle of irregular verbs, when to use it,
as well as how to use it in the active and passive voices.

< voltar para o índice


220
Modal Verb May
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning
to the main verb. Modal verbs can express possibility, probability, ability,
permission, assumption, obligation, or prohibition.
The sentence structure of modal verbs follows the same pattern:

MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

< voltar para o índice


221
The modal verb may can be used to express probability.
In such cases, we are saying that something is likely to happen, that there’s a
chance that something will happen. For example:

MODAL VERB MAY


Expressing Probability

It may rain.
Pode chover. / Pode ser que chova.
(There is a reasonable chance that it will rain).

I may go to the party.


Eu posso ir à festa. / Pode ser que eu vá à festa.
(There is a reasonable chance that I will go to the party).

She may be at home.


Ela pode estar em casa. / Pode ser que ela esteja em casa.
(There is a reasonable chance that she will be home).

The modal verb may can also be used to say that there
is a chance that something does not happen.
In this case, we use it in the negative form. Take a look:

MODAL VERB MAY


Expressing Unlikely Things

I may not be the best student in class, but I’m very dedicated.
Eu posso não ser o melhor aluno da turma, mas eu sou muito dedicado.

Be careful with the pieces of news you read on social media. They may not be true.
Tenha cuidado com notícias que você lê nas redes sociais. Elas podem não ser verdadeiras.

Researchers may not be able to find the cure to some diseases,


but they’ve been doing their best.
Pesquisadores podem (até) não ser capazes de achar a cura para algumas doenças,
mas eles têm dado o melhor de si.

< voltar para o índice


222
It is rare to see may in the interrogative form to give the idea of probability.
The interrogative form is used as a formal way to ask for permission. In such
cases, may is used in questions in the first person, either singular or plural.

MODAL VERB MAY


Asking for Permission

Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?


Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?
(May I come in? = First person singular – I).

May we talk to you for a minute, sir?


Nós podemos falar com senhor por um minuto?
(May we talk…? = First person plural – We).

When we ask for permission, the interrogative form can only be used in the first person.
However, when we answer these permission requests, that is, when we give permission or not, we will use
the affirmative or the negative forms in the second person. Have a look:

MODAL VERB MAY


Giving Permission (or not)

Asking for permission: Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?
Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?
Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may come in. / No, you may not come in.
Sim, você pode entrar. / Não, você não pode entrar.

Asking for permission: May we talk to you for a minute, sir?


Nós podemos falar com o senhor por um minuto?
Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may. / No, you may not.
Sim, vocês podem. / Não, vocês não podem.

And now you know how to use the modal verb may.

< voltar para o índice


223
Modal Verb Might
Modal verbs, also known as modal auxiliary verbs, add meaning to the main
verb. Modals can express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption,
obligation, or prohibition.
The modal verb might is mainly used to say that there’s a weak probability that
something will happen, except in the interrogative form.

MODAL VERB
Structure

Affirmative
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb (Base Form) +
Complement (if necessary)

We might go to Paris in the holiday season.


Pode ser que nós vamos para Paris na temporada de férias.
É possível que nós vamos para Paris na temporada de férias.
Há uma pequena chance de nós irmos para Paris na temporada de férias.

Negative
Subject + Modal Verb + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) +
Complement (if necessary)

I might not go to the party.


Pode ser que eu não vá à festa.
É possível que eu não vá à festa.
É pouco provável que eu vá à festa.

Interrogative
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb (Base Form) +
Complement (if necessary)

Might I ask you a question?


Eu poderia fazer uma pergunta a você?

< voltar para o índice


224
Questions with might are used when we want to ask for permission in formal contexts.
But it is important to note that the modal verb may has this same function in the interrogative
form, and it is usually preferred.
Now, let’s see the uses of the modal verb might.
Might can be used to express probability when we want to express that we believe
something is not really likely to happen, so there’s a small chance, it’s a slight probability.

MODAL VERB – MIGHT


Uses

I might be wrong, but I don’t think that’s a good decision.


Pode ser que eu esteja errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
É possível que eu esteja errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
Há uma pequena chance de eu estar errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.

Kate might not be able to get to the meeting in time.


Pode ser que a Kate não chegue a tempo na reunião.
É possível que a Kate não chegue a tempo na reunião.
É pouco provável que a Kate chegue a tempo na reunião.

We can also use might to make suggestions.

MODAL VERB – MIGHT


Uses

You might like this book I am reading.


Pode ser que você goste desse livro que eu estou lendo.
É possível que você goste desse livro que eu estou lendo.

You might want to try the gazpacho. It’s delicious.


Pode ser que você queira experimentar o gaspacho. Está delicioso.
É possível que você queira experimentar o gaspacho. Está delicioso.

Now you know what a modal verb is, the structures you’ll use with them, and
when and how to use the modal verb might.

< voltar para o índice


225
Modal Verb Should
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning
to the main verb.
Modal verbs will follow the same sentence structure in the affirmative, negative,
and interrogative forms. Check the following table to see how it works:

MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

< voltar para o índice


226
The modal verb should has different uses. One of the most frequent is to give advice or
recommendations. For example:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Advice and Recommendation

You should check the airline policies before you pack.


Você deve verificar as políticas da companhia aérea antes de fazer as malas.

You shouldn’t drink so much coffee.


Você não deve beber tanto café.

Depending on the context, sentences with the modal verb should can be understood
as a polite way to talk about obligations and duties. Have a look at some examples:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Expressing Obligations and Duties

You should clean your room. People should respect other people’s choices.
Você deve limpar o seu quarto. As pessoas devem respeitar as escolhas de outras pessoas.
(It’s your responsibility). (It’s a social rule).

In some other cases, should expresses that something is probable because it is logical or normal,
that is, you refer to a deduction. For instance:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Deductions

She left home half an hour ago. She should be arriving.


Ela saiu de casa meia hora atrás. Ela deve estar chegando.
(It’s a deduction based on the time she left her house and how far her home is from here)

The singer should launch her new album next month.


A cantora deve lançar o seu novo álbum mês que vem.
(Deduction based on behavior or clues).

< voltar para o índice


227
When talking about modals, the meaning we want to convey
depends on the context. The same sentence may have different
meanings. Compare:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Different Meanings Depending on the Context

You should get here before noon.


Você deve chegar aqui antes de meio-dia.

• It could be a piece of advice


• Poderia ser um conselho

• It could be your duty


• Poderia ser sua obrigação

• It could be the speaker’s expectation


• Poderia ser uma expectativa do falante

And this is how you use the modal verb should.

< voltar para o índice


228
Modal Verb Would
Modal Verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning to the main
verb. They express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption, obligation, or
prohibition.
The structure of the modal verbs follows the same pattern. Check the following table.

MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

In some cases, the modal verb would is used as a softer and less definitive form of the modal will,
or as the past of will when we are reporting sentences.
Expressing hypothesis is one of the most common uses of the modal verb would. And since it is
used to express hypothetical situations, you’ll see that it is used in many conditional sentences.
In such cases, we’ll use a clause with would to refer to unreal or uncertain situations together with
an if-clause.

< voltar para o índice


229
MODAL VERB WOULD
Hypothesis

If I had a lot of money, I would travel the world.


Se eu tivesse muito dinheiro, viajaria pelo mundo.
(I don’t have a lot of money. So, traveling the world is just a hypothetical situation.)

Would you invite your boss for your birthday?


Você convidaria o seu chefe para o seu aniversário?
(The question is asked out of curiosity. It’s a hypothetical situation.)

If I were you, I wouldn’t go the Caribbean now. It’s hurricane season.


Se eu fosse você, eu não iria para o Caribe agora. É temporada de furacão.
(It’s a hypothetical situation because I am not you, and I am not going to the Caribbean.)

We can also use would to make polite requests. If we observe it carefully, we’ll see that it’s still
a request made from a hypothetical perspective, but now you are actually asking something
from someone.

MODAL VERB WOULD


Polite Requests and Offers

Polite Requests Polite Offers

Would you help me with my project? Would you like some coffee?
Você me ajudaria com o meu projeto? Você aceitaria um café?

Would you go to the grocery store for me? Would you like me to drive you home?
Você iria ao supermercado para mim? Você gostaria que eu te levasse para casa?

< voltar para o índice


230
Would is also used to talk about a past habit or to express refusal in the past.

MODAL VERB WOULD


Talk about a past habit or express refusal in the past

I asked her what was going on, but she wouldn’t tell me.
Perguntei o que estava acontecendo, mas ela não quis me dizer.
(I asked her in the past and she refused to tell me.)

When I was younger, I would argue with my brother all the time.
Quando eu era mais novo, eu discutia com meu irmão o tempo todo.
(It was a typical behavior in the past.)

We can use would in expressions too. Would rather is used to say we prefer
one thing to another. Most of the times, we use the contracted form, which is
“I’d rather.”

MODAL VERB WOULD


Expressions – Would Rather

I’d rather stay home tonight. I’m tired.


Eu prefiro ficar em casa hoje à noite. Estou cansado(a).

Another commonly used expression with would is “would mind.” We use it to ask for favors or permission.
But the structure is a bit different. Check it out in the following box.

MODAL VERB WOULD


Expressions – Would Mind

Asking for a favor Asking for permission

Would you mind opening the window? Would you mind if I opened the window?
Você se importaria de abrir a janela? Você se importaria se eu abrisse a janela?
(Would you mind + verb in the -ING form) (Would you mind if + subject + verb in the past)

And this is how you use the modal verb would.

< voltar para o índice


231
Object Pronouns
There are two types of personal pronouns in English: personal pronouns used in the subject
position, which, for that reason, are called subject pronouns, and personal pronouns used in the
object position, which are called object pronouns.
Check the following table to see the subject and object pronouns.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS

Subject Pronouns Object Pronouns


(Replace nouns as subjects) (Replace nouns as objects)


First person I me

singular eu me/mim


Second person you you

singular tu/você te/ti/você/lhe

he him
ele ele/o/lhe


Third person she her

singular ela ela/a/lhe

it it
ele/ela ele/ela/o/a/lhe


First person we us

plural nós nos/nós


Second person you you

plural vós/vocês vos/vocês/lhes


Third person they them

plural eles/elas eles/elas/os/as/lhes

< voltar para o índice


232
Object pronouns are usually placed after the main verb of the sentence, since they
function as the object of these verbs. They might not be placed immediately after the
main verb, but they will always come after it. The only exception to this rule is when
they are used in certain expressions such as both of us, all of them, none of you,
etc. In such situations, they can be part of the subject of a sentence.
Let’s now take a closer look at each object pronoun.

Some languages present variations of the object pronouns used depending on the
verb they are complementing. But that won’t happen in English.
The first-person pronouns used in the position of the object of the sentence will
always be me for the singular and us for the plural.

OBJE CT PRONOUN
First Person Singular

Tell me. What is your problem?


Conte-me. Qual é o seu problema?

Read this story to me, please!


Leia esta história para mim, por favor!

Do you want to talk to me?


Você quer falar comigo?

OBJE CT PRONOUN
First Person Plural

Tell us about your day.


Conte-nos sobre o seu dia.

Are they talking about us?


Eles estão falando sobre nós / a gente?

Do you want to go to the movies with us?


Você quer ir ao cinema conosco / com a gente?

< voltar para o índice


233
For the second person, the personal
OBJE CT PRONOUN
pronoun used as the object pronoun is
Second Person Singular/Plural
the same used as the subject pronoun:
you. And it is used for both singular and
plural. Therefore, the context tells us if I’ll help you.
you will be referring to singular or plural. Eu vou te ajudar. / Eu vou ajudar você. / Eu vou lhe ajudar. /
Eu vou ajudar vocês/ Eu vou lhes ajudar.

I don’t understand you.


Eu não te entendo. / Eu não entendo você. /
Eu não entendo vocês.

When we read these sentences, it’s not clear if we are using you to refer to one
or to more people, that is, singular or plural. Especially because they are isolated
sentences.
In spoken language, chances are the context will make it clear, since you is used
to refer to the person or to the people you are talking to. Either way, you can make
it clearer that you are using the plural form by combining you with other words,
for example: you people, you all, or you both.

OBJE CT PRONOUN
Second Person Plural

I’ll help you people / you all / you both.


Eu vou ajudar vocês / vocês todos / vocês dois.

The third person singular object pronouns used for people are: him for masculine
and her for feminine. Both are used mostly for people.

OBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (Him/Her)

Mike’s son looks just like him.


O filho do Mike se parece muito com ele.
(The object pronoun him refers to “Mike,” a male noun,
and it’s the object of the sentence.)

My sister is an amazing person. I love to talk to her.


Minha irmã é uma pessoa incrível. Eu adoro conversar com ela.
(We used the object pronoun her to replace the female noun “my sister.”)

< voltar para o índice


234
There’s still another third person singular object pronoun that is used for the other
cases: the pronoun it. This personal pronoun will also have the same form when
used as the subject or as the object pronoun.

OBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)

I don’t understand this topic. I don’t understand it.


Eu não entendo este tópico. Eu não entendo (isto).

I love chocolate cake. I love it.


Eu adoro bolo de chocolate. Eu adoro (isso).

I’m watching this show. I’m watching it.


Estou assistindo a este programa. Estou assistindo (a isto).

In the third person plural, we’ll use they as the subject pronoun, and them as the object pronoun. In the
plural, we will use the same pronoun to refer to people, places, objects, animals, or any other third person
plural reference.

OBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Plural (Them)

I’m going to the beach with my friends. I’m going to the beach with them.
Estou indo à praia com meus amigos. Estou indo à praia com eles.
(The object is “my friends,” and it’s in the plural, so we could replace it with the object pronoun them.)

I don’t know those people. I don’t know them.


Eu não conheço aquelas pessoas. Eu não as conheço. / Eu não conheço elas.
(To avoid repetition, we can replace the object “those people” for the object pronoun them.)

I like these shoes. I like them.


Eu gosto destes sapatos. Eu gosto deles.
(The object of the sentence is “these shoes.” To avoid repetition, we can use the object pronoun them.)

And now you know more about object pronouns.

< voltar para o índice


235
Passive Voice
There are usually two ways to make a statement:

1. B
 y using the ACTIVE VOICE. In this case, we emphasize the doer of an action,
which is the subject.
Usando a voz ativa. Nestes casos, enfatizamos aquele que executa a ação, o sujeito.

2. By using the PASSIVE VOICE. In such cases, we emphasize to the receiver of the
action. The receiver in the active voice becomes the subject in the passive voice.
Usando a voz passiva. Nestes casos, enfatizamos o receptor da ação. O receptor da
voz ativa se transforma no sujeito da voz passiva.

Check the examples in the table to see how it works.

ACTIVE VOICE VS. PASSIVE VOICE

Active Voice

People speak Portuguese in Brazil.


As pessoas falam português no Brasil.
(The focus is on the subject people, and Portuguese is the object.)
(O foco está no sujeito “people” e “Portuguese” é o objeto.)

Passive Voice

Portuguese is spoken in Brazil (Portuguese = subject)


Português é falado no Brasil.
(Portuguese is the subject of the sentence for we want to emphasize the language and not who speaks it.)
(“Portuguese” é o sujeito da frase, porque queremos enfatizar o idioma, e não quem o fala.)

< voltar para o índice


236
So, as we’ve seen, the object in the active voice becomes the subject of the passive voice. The subject of
the active voice becomes the agent of the passive voice, and it can be left out of the sentence. If it is included,
it is preceded by the preposition by.

ACTIVE VOICE VS. PASSIVE VOICE

Active Voice Passive Voice

People speak Portuguese in Brazil. Portuguese is spoken by people in Brazil.


As pessoas falam português no Brasil. Português é falado pelas pessoas no Brasil.
(People = Subject of (By people = Agent of
the Active Voice obligatory) the Passive Voice optional)

In order to turn the active voice into the passive voice, there are some steps to be
followed. Check them out in the table.

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

1. Use the object of the active voice as the subject of the passive voice.
Use o objeto da voz ativa como o sujeito da voz passiva.

2. Include auxiliary verbs depending on the verb form.


Inclua verbos auxiliares dependendo da forma verbal.

3. Include the verb TO BE as the auxiliary verb of the passive voice (use
the same verb form as the main verb in the active voice).
Inclua o verbo TO BE como verbo auxiliar da voz passiva ( no mesmo
tempo verbal do verbo principal).

4. Use the main verb of the active voice in the past participle.
Use o verbo principal da voz ativa no particípio passado.

5. Include the agent of the passive (if necessary).


Inclua o agente da passiva (se necessário).

6. Adverbs or adverbial phrases may be placed in the same position in


both active and passive voices.
Advérbios ou locuções adverbiais podem ser colocados na mesma posição
tanto na voz ativa quanto na voz passiva.

< voltar para o índice


237
Let’s see some examples of how we can turn active sentences into the passive voice.

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

Active Voice

Jane Austen probably wrote Pride and Prejudice in 1812.


Jane Austen provavelmente escreveu Orgulho e preconceito em 1812.

Passive Voice

Pride and Prejudice was probably written in 1812.


Orgulho e preconceito provavelmente foi escrito em 1812.

Pride and Prejudice was probably written in 1812 by Jane Austin.


Orgulho e preconceito provavelmente foi escrito em 1812 por Jane Austin.

Let’s see an example of a sentence in which there are auxiliary verbs in the active voice.

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE

Active Voice

My brother was painting my house on the weekend.


Meu irmão estava pintando a minha casa no fim de semana.

Passive Voice

My house was being painted on the weekend.


Minha casa estava sendo pintada no fim de semana.

My house was being painted by my brother on the weekend.


Minha casa estava sendo pintada pelo meu irmão no fim de semana.

It’s important to notice that not every sentence in the active voice can be turned into the passive voice.
This happens when there is no object in the sentence or when the meaning would not be clear in the passive
voice. Or it could be simply because the emphasis or focus intended by the speaker cannot be expressed by a
passive structure.

< voltar para o índice


238
ACTIVE VOICE ONLY

Julia is a lovely girl. We studied together. Mary has two sons.


A Julia é uma menina adorável. Nós estudamos juntos. Mary tem dois filhos.

The active voice is definitely the most frequent construction in


communication. When the speaker chooses to move from the active
voice to the passive voice, there is usually a reason for that. For
example, if we consider that the doer of the action is irrelevant, we’ll
go for the passive voice.

PASSIVE VOICE
Uses – The doer is irrelevant

Pompeii was rediscovered late in the 16th century.


Pompeia foi redescoberta no fim do século XVI.

If the doer is unknown, we’ll also use the passive voice.

PASSIVE VOICE
Uses – The doer is unknown

My cell phone was stolen.


O meu celular foi roubado.

In scientific contexts, the passive voice is commonly used.

PASSIVE VOICE
Uses – Formal / Scientific contexts

The new drug wasn’t tested on animals.


O novo remédio não foi testado em animais.

Now you know the difference between the active and passive voices, the structure of the passive
voice and how to use it, as well as cases in which the passive voice can’t be used.

< voltar para o índice


239
Possessive Adjectives
Possessive adjectives are always used before a noun, and they determine who
possesses the noun to which they refer.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES

my dog
meu cachorro
(It’s not your dog or his dog, it is my dog)

our house
nossa casa
(It’s not a house or a beautiful house, it is our house)

their books
os livros deles
(It’s not just any book, it is their books)

Take a look at the following table to see all the possessive adjectives in English.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES

Singular Plural

My Our
First person
meu(s), minha(s) nosso(s), nossa(s)

Your Your
Second person
teu(s), tua(s), seu(s), sua(s) seus, suas, de vocês

His
seu(s), sua(s), dele

Her Their
Third
person seu(s), sua(s), dela seus, suas, deles, delas

Its
seu(s), sua(s), dele, dela

< voltar para o índice


240
It is important to notice that possessive adjectives in English do not suffer
number or gender variations according to the nouns to which they are referring,
as opposed to what happens in several other languages.
That means that the possessive adjectives will keep the same form whether they
are referring to a singular noun or to a plural noun, as well as to a masculine,
neutral, or female noun.

Let’s take a closer look at each one of them.


For the first person, we’ll use the possessive adjective my in the singular or our
in the plural.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES


First Person (singular and plural)

This is my dog. These are my daughters.


Este é o meu cachorro. Estas são minhas filhas.

That is our house. Those are our sons.


Aquela é nossa casa. Aqueles são nossos filhos.

For the second person, we’ll use your. This possessive adjective will
be the same for both the singular and plural forms, and only the
context will make it clear if we are referring to one or more owners.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES


Second Person

Is this cute boy your son?


Este menino fofo é seu/teu filho?
Este menino fofo é filho de vocês?

< voltar para o índice


241
When we express possession referring to the third person, singular or plural,
we can use the possessive case or the possessive adjectives his, her, its in the
singular, or their in the plural.
The possessive case might be preferred if it is not clear in the context to whom
we are referring.

POSSESSIVE CASE

I’m going to Jeff’s birthday party.


Eu estou indo à festa de aniversário do Jeff.

(Jeff’s name wasn’t mentioned before, so the possessive case is used


because it makes it clear whose birthday party it is.)
(O nome do Jeff não havia sido mencionado anteriormente, então usa-se o
possessive case porque ele deixa claro de quem é a festa de aniversário.)

If the context makes it clear to whose party we are referring, we can replace the
possessive case with a third person possessive adjective.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVE

Jeff is my best friend. I’m going to his birthday party.


Jeff é o meu melhor amigo. Eu estou indo à sua festa de aniversário.

For the third person singular, we’ll use the possessive adjectives his for a masculine owner, her for feminine,
and, for other cases, we will use its.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES


Third Person Singular

George is traveling with his wife.


George está viajando com a sua esposa / a esposa dele.

(We used “his” because we are talking about George’s wife, and George is a man.)
(Usamos his porque estamos nos referindo à esposa do George, e George é um homem.)

< voltar para o índice


242
Paula is traveling with her husband.
Paula está viajando com o seu marido / o marido dela.

(We used “her” because we are talking about Paula’s husband, and Paula is a woman.)
(Usamos her porque estamos nos referindo ao marido da Paula, e Paula é uma mulher.)

Don’t use this computer. Its keyboard is not working.


Não use este computador. Seu teclado / O teclado dele não está funcionando.

(We used “its” because we are talking about the computer keyboard, which is an object.)
(Usamos its porque estamos nos referindo ao teclado do computador, que é um objeto.)

In the third person plural, we will use their regardless of the gender.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES


Third Person Plural

George and Paula are traveling with their son.


George e Paula estão viajando com o seu filho / o filho deles.

The kids are playing with their toys.


As crianças estão brincando com os seus brinquedos / os brinquedos delas.

And this is how we use the possessive adjectives in English.

< voltar para o índice


243
Possessive Case
The possessive case is used in English to express possession, as well
as interpersonal relationships, such as family, friendship, or hierarchic
relationships.
The structure of the possessive case is the following:

POSSESSIVE CASE ( ’S)

( 1 ) Noun identifying who owns something


( 2 ) Particle that identifies the possession or relationship (’s)
( 3 ) Noun identifying the element that is possessed

(1) (2) (3)

These are Mary’s shoes.


Estes são os sapatos da Mary.

(1) (2) (3)

That is Julia’s cat.


Aquele é o gato da Julia.

(1) (2) (3)

This is Martin’s son.


Este é o filho do Martin.

(1) (2) (3)


Mr. Johnson is Karen’s boss.
Sr. Johnson é o chefe da Karen.

There are situations in which more than one person will be identified as the
owner of an object or animal, or even some sort of relationship. In such cases, we
may identify each of these people, but there are two different ways to build this
structure.

< voltar para o índice


244
In the first situation we’re going to explore, there is only one object that is
shared by two or more people, so we don’t repeat the apostrophe + S indicating
possession; that means we’ll use it only once, after the last noun.

POSSESSIVE CASE

One element two or more owners


One apostrophe + s (’s) after the last noun

This is Peter and John’s bedroom.


Este é o quarto do Peter e do John.
(There is only one bedroom owned by Peter and John)
(Há apenas um quarto que pertence a Peter e John)

Molly is Carol and Tom’s daughter.


A Molly é filha da Carol e do Tom.
(Both Carol and Tom are Molly’s parents)
(Tanto Carol quanto Tom são pais da Molly)

In the other situation, there is more than one object that belongs to different
people. In this case, we’ll repeat the apostrophe + S indicating possession
after each person.

POSSESSIVE CASE

Two or more elements two or more owners


One apostrophe + s (’s) after each person

These are Peter’s and John’s beds.


Estas são as camas do Peter e do John.
(There are two beds: one belongs to Peter and the other, to John)
(Há duas camas: uma pertence a Peter, e a outra, a John)

These are Peter’s and John’s bikes.


Estas são as bicicletas do Peter e do John.
(There are two bikes: one belongs to Peter and the other, to John)
(Há duas bicicletas: uma pertence a Peter, e a outra, a John)

< voltar para o índice


245
When the noun identifying who owns the element is in the plural
and ends in -S, we will add just an apostrophe.

POSSESSIVE CASE

Owner in the plural ending in -S


Add just the apostrophe (’)

These are the girls’ shoes.


Estes são os sapatos das meninas.

Those are the boys’ bikes.


Aquelas são as bicicletas dos meninos.

This is the kids’ bedroom.


Este é o quarto das crianças.

For singular nouns ending in -S or for nouns with irregular plural,


we will use the apostrophe + S.

POSSESSIVE CASE
Nouns ending in -S

That is my boss’s wife.


Aquela é a esposa do meu chefe.

This is Jonas’s bedroom.


Este é o quarto do Jonas.

These are the children’s games.


Estes são os jogos das crianças.

There are still cases in which we omit the noun that identifies the
element we are talking about. That happens when it’s clear in the
context what we are talking about.

< voltar para o índice


246
POSSESSIVE CASE

Is this Mark’s bedroom?


Esse é o quarto do Mark?

No, this is Peter’s.


Não, esse é do Peter.
(We can omit the noun “bedroom” in the answer since it’s clear that we are talking about it.)
(Podemos omitir o substantivo “bedroom” na resposta, pois fica claro que estamos falando sobre isso.)

Are you going home?


Você está indo para casa?

Yes, but I’ll stop by Julia’s first.


Sim, mas eu vou passar na Julia primeiro.
(It’s clear in this context that we are referring to Julia’s house, so we can omit the noun “house.”)
(É claro pelo contexto que estamos nos referindo à casa da Julia, por isso podemos
omitir o substantivo “house”.)

That’s it. Now you know the structure and the use of the possessive case.

< voltar para o índice


247
Possessive Pronouns
There are different ways to express possession in English. For example, we can
use the verb to have, the possessive case, possessive adjectives, or possessive
pronouns.

EXPRESSING POSSESSION

Julia has two dogs. These are Julia’s dogs.


A Julia tem dois cachorros. Estes são os cachorros da Julia.

These are her dogs. These dogs are hers.


Estes são os cachorros dela. Estes cachorros são dela.

The possessive case structure will only be used to refer to the third person,
either singular or plural.

POSSESSIVE CASE

This is Peter’s wallet. This is the president’s house.


Esta é a carteira do Peter. Esta é a casa do presidente.

This is Brian and Meg’s baby.


Este é o bebê do Brian e da Meg.

< voltar para o índice


248
It is possible to omit the noun following the possessive if it’s clear what we are
talking about in the context. For example:

POSSESSIVE CASE
Omitting the Noun

Whose shirt is this? It is Joana’s.


De quem é esta camisa? É da Joana.

Possessive adjectives also indicate possession or belonging, and they are always
used before a noun. They are called possessive adjectives precisely because they
are placed in the same position as most adjectives in English: before the noun.

POSSESSIVE ADJE CTIVES

Is this your shirt? Yes, this is my shirt.


Esta é a sua camisa? Sim, esta é a minha camisa.

However, when it is not necessary to mention what you are talking about
because it is clear in that context or because the noun has been mentioned before
in the sentence or in the conversation, we will replace the structure possessive
adjective + noun with a possessive pronoun.

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

Yes, it’s mine.


Is this your shirt?
Sim, é minha.
Esta é a sua camisa?
(“mine” = my shirt).

< voltar para o índice


249
Now, check the following table with possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns according to
whom they refer.

Possessive Adjective Possessive Pronoun

First person my mine


Singular meu, meus, minha, minhas meu, meus, minha, minhas

your yours
Second person seu, seus, sua, suas, seu, seus, sua, suas,
Singular teu, teus, tua, tuas teu, teus, tua, tuas

his his
dele dele

Third person her hers


Singular dela dela

its its
dele, dela dele, dela

First person our ours


Plural nosso, nossos, nossa, nossas nosso, nossos, nossa, nossas

your yours
Second person seus, suas, vosso, vossos, seus, suas, vosso, vossos,
Plural vossa, vossas vossa, vossas

Third person their theirs


Plural delas, deles delas, deles

And now you know how to express possession in English,


especially using possessive pronouns.

< voltar para o índice


250
Present Continuous
The present continuous is mainly used to talk about actions and events in
progress at the moment or about temporary states or situations that are true at
the moment of speaking.
The basic structure of the present continuous is the verb to be, which works as
an auxiliary, and a main verb in the -ING form. The verb to be will be conjugated
according to the subject. Take a look at its structure:

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Structure

Affirmative
Subject + To Be + Verb in the -ING Form + Complement

I am watching a movie.
Eu estou assistindo a um filme.

Negative
Subject + To Be + Not + Verb in the -ING Form + Complement

I am not hearing you.


Eu não estou te ouvindo.

Interrogative
To Be + Subject + Verb in the -ING Form + Complement

Are you taking your pills?


Você está tomando os seus remédios?

< voltar para o índice


251
The present continuous can also be used to describe
actions that are repeated or frequent, but that we
believe to be a temporary situation, different from our
routine.

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Repeated Temporary Actions and Events

I am working a lot this week.


Estou trabalhando muito nesta semana.

We can use the present continuous to talk about


changes that take time.

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Gradual Change

It’s getting easier every day.


Está ficando mais fácil a cada dia.

The present continuous is also used to talk about future


events that have been previously arranged or planned.

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Future

I am getting married next week.


Vou me casar na próxima semana.

Some verbs are not used in the continuous form,


PRESENT CONTINUOUS
even if they refer to temporary situations or things
Non-progressive Verbs
that are happening now. They are called non-
progressive verbs, and they express feelings, like
the verbs to love and to hate; mental states and I like this book.
opinions, like the verbs to believe, to guess, and to NOT: I am liking this book.
agree; and senses, like the verbs to see and to hear. Eu gosto desse livro.

< voltar para o índice


252
Some of these non-progressive verbs can be used with continuous forms,
but they will have different meanings.

PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Non-progressive Verbs in Continuous Forms: Different Meaning

I see someone at the door.


Eu estou vendo alguém na porta.

I am seeing someone.
Eu estou saindo com alguém.

I have two pieces of luggage.


Eu tenho duas malas.

I am having breakfast at the hotel restaurant.


Eu estou tomando café da manhã no restaurante do hotel.

Now you know what the present continuous is all about: you’ve seen its
structure, some examples, and how to properly use it.

< voltar para o índice


253
Question Word - How
Common question words include what, when, where, which, why, who,
and how. On this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the question word how.
The question word how means “in what way” or “to what extent” and, as all the
other question words, it can be used in direct and indirect questions.

QUESTION WORD – HOW


Direct and Indirect Questions

How are you feeling?


Como você está se sentindo?
(Direct Question: How + Structure of the Interrogative Form)

Can you tell me how you are feeling?


Você pode me dizer como está se sentindo?
(Indirect Question: How + Structure of the Affirmative Form)

The structure for direct questions is the question word followed by the
interrogative form, and it can be used with different verb forms.
In the simple present, we can use how with the verb to be or with other verbs.
The difference is that when the verb to be is the main verb, we do not use an
auxiliary verb. For all the other verbs, an auxiliary must be used to create the
questions.
Check out some examples:

QUESTION WORD – HOW


Simple Present

Structure: How + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)

How are the kids?


Como estão as crianças?
( main verb is the verb to be = do not use an auxiliary verb)

< voltar para o índice


254
Structure: How + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form
+ Complement (if necessary)

How do you go to work?


Como você vai para o trabalho?
( main verb is not the verb to be = the auxiliary verb do must be used)

How can also be used in the simple past, and the structure will follow the same
pattern of the simple present. The difference is that the verb to be or the auxiliary
verb will be conjugated in the past.

QUESTION WORD – HOW


Simple Past

Structure: How + Verb to Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)

How was the game?


Como foi o jogo?
( main verb is the verb to be = do not use an auxiliary verb)

Structure: How + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form +
Complement (if necessary)

How did you go to the game?


Como você foi para o jogo?
( main verb is not the verb to be = the auxiliary verb did must be used)

The question word how can also be used with continuous forms such as the
present and the past continuous. In this case, we’ll use how followed by the
interrogative form of these structures.
For the interrogative form of the present and past continuous, the verb to be
works as an auxiliary verb, followed by the subject, the main verb in the -ING
form, and a complement, if necessary.

< voltar para o índice


255
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Present and Past Continuous

Structure: How + Verb to Be + Subject + Main Verb in the -ING Form +


Complement (if necessary)

How are you organizing your tasks?


Como você está organizando as suas tarefas?
(I am asking about an action that is in progress now)

How were you feeling when you started therapy?


Como você estava se sentindo quando iniciou a terapia?
(I asked about a feeling that was going on before the person decided to start therapy)

It is also possible to use how with perfect forms such as the present perfect and
the present perfect continuous.

QUESTION WORD – HOW


Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous

Structure: How + Verb To Have + Subject +


Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)

How have you been?


Como você tem estado?
(I want to know how this person has been lately or since I last saw him or her)

Structure: How + Verb To Have + Subject + Been +


Main Verb in the –ING Form + Complement (if necessary)

How have you been dealing with this situation?


Como você tem lidado com essa situação?
(It’s an ongoing situation that started in the past and is still going on)

< voltar para o índice


256
We also use how with modal
QUESTION WORD – HOW
verbs. In this case, they come right
Modal Verbs
after the question word.

Structure: How + Modal Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

How should we help her?


Como devemos ajudá-la?
(Should works as an auxiliary, and it was used to ask for
guidance or recommendation)

How can we go to the party?


Como podemos ir para a festa?
(Can works as an auxiliary, and it shows the idea of possibility)

If you want to ask more specific questions using how, you can use an
adjective or an adverb after it. Check out the examples.

QUESTION WORD – HOW


Other Possibilities

How old is your brother? How often do you go to the gym?


Quantos anos seu irmão tem? Com que frequência você vai à academia?
(How + Old = Age) (How + Often = Frequency)

How much is this T-shirt? How many people were there at the concert?
Quanto custa esta camiseta? Quantas pessoas havia no show?
(How + Much = Amount or Price) (How + Many = Quantity)

How far is San Diego from Los Angeles?


Quão distante é San Diego de Los Angeles? / Qual é a distância de San Diego a Los Angeles?
(How + Far = Distance)

How long does it take to get there? How tall is your brother?
Qual tempo demora para chegar lá? Qual é a altura do seu irmão?
(How + Long = Duration) (How + Tall = Height for People)

How high is Mount Everest?


Quão alto é o Monte Everest? / Qual é a altura do Monte Everest?
(How + High = Height for Places)

< voltar para o índice


257
How can also be used with prepositions such as “about.” There are
two ways we can use it—to offer something or to make a suggestion.

HOW ABOUT
Offers and Suggestions

How about a cup of coffee?


Que tal uma xícara de café?
(How + About + Noun = Offer)

How about going to the movies?


Que tal irmos ao cinema?
(How + About + Verb in the –ING Form = Suggestion)

In spoken English, there is a very common expression with how—how come. It is


used to ask about the reason why something has happened. We could say that how
come is an informal way to ask “why.”
How come can also be used to show surprise. There is an important detail in the
structure of the question, though: how come is always followed by the affirmative
form, regardless of the verb form.

HOW ABOUT
Reason and Surprise (Informal)

How come she went to the party alone?


Como assim ela foi à festa sozinha?
(How Come + Structure of the Affirmative Form in the Simple Past)

How come she is not here?


Como é que ela não está aqui?
Como pode ela não estar aqui?
(How Come + Affirmative Form of the Simple Present)

< voltar para o índice


258
We can also use how in exclamations. It can either be followed by a complete
sentence or by an adjective. It’s important to notice, though, that what can also
be used in exclamations.
The difference is that when there is either a complete sentence or only an
adjective, you’ll use how. However, in the case of the structure adjective + noun
or just a noun, you’ll have to use what.
Compare the difference:

HOW AND WHAT


Exclamation

How + Complete Sentence

How I love this city!


Como eu amo essa cidade!
(How + Subject “I” + Main Verb “love” + Complement “this city”)

How + Adjective

How beautiful!
Que bonito!
(How + Adjective “beautiful”)

What + (Article) + Adjective + Noun

What a beautiful city!


Que cidade bonita!
(What + Article “a” + Adjective “beautiful” + Noun “city”)

And now you know different ways to use the question word how, it’s meaning, structures in
different verb forms, as well as how to use it in exclamations.

< voltar para o índice


259
Question Word -
What
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. On this grammar
guide, we’ll focus on the question word what, which is used to ask general
questions.
In most cases, the structure of direct and indirect questions follows this pattern:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Direct and Indirect Questions

What is your favorite color?


Qual é a sua cor favorita?
(Direct Question: Question Word + Interrogative Form)

Tell me what your favorite color is.


Diga-me qual é a sua cor favorita.
(Indirect Question: Question Word + Affirmative Form)

But when we ask direct questions with the question word what, there are three
possible structures.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Structure – Direct Questions

1. What + Interrogative Form

2. What + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement

3. What + Noun + Interrogative Form

< voltar para o índice


260
Let’s analyze each structure, starting with the first one, which is the question
word what followed by an interrogative form. This structure can be used with
any verb form.
Let’s see some examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Interrogative Form

What does she want for breakfast?


O que ela quer de café da manhã?

(Simple Present: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in its Base Form+ Complement)

What did you do yesterday?


O que você fez ontem?

(Simple Past: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in its Base Form + Complement)

What were you doing last week?


O que você estava fazendo semana passada?

(Past Continuous: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in the –ING Form + Complement)

What have you been doing lately?


O que você tem feito ultimamente?

(Present Perfect: Question Word + 1st Auxiliary + Subject + 2nd Auxiliary +


Main verb in the –ING Form + Complement)

What would you do with a million dollars?


O que você faria com um milhão de dólares?

(Simple Present: Question Word + Modal Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in its Base Form + Complement)

< voltar para o índice


261
It is important to notice that the structure what + interrogative form will never be used for
questions about the subject of the sentence. When we follow this structure, it means that the
subject is included in the given question.
Let’s take a closer look:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Interrogative Form

What does she want for breakfast?


O que ela quer de café da manhã?

She wants eggs and toast.


Ela quer ovos e torradas.

(The question is not about who performs the action, but about what the person
wants. The subject “she” is part of the question. The core answer is “eggs and toast.”)
(Não tem relação com o sujeito, mas com o que o sujeito quer fazer.
O sujeito “ela” é parte da pergunta. A resposta central é “ovos e torradas”.)

What were you doing last week?


O que você estava fazendo semana passada?

I was traveling.
Eu estava viajando.

(It’s not about who was performing the action, but what the person was doing.
The subject “you,” which is part of the question, becomes “I” in the answer.
And the core answer is “traveling.”)
(Não tem relação com quem estava fazendo a ação, mas com o que a pessoa estava
fazendo. O sujeito “você”, que é parte da pergunta, vira “eu” na resposta.
A resposta central é “viajando”.)

< voltar para o índice


262
But it is possible to ask questions with the question word what to learn about the subject of a sentence.
In such cases, we will use the structure: What + Verb in The Third Person Singular + Complement.
Check the following examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Verb in Third Person Singular + (Complement)

What makes you happy? Spending time with my family makes me happy.
O que deixa você feliz? Passar tempo com a minha família me deixa feliz.

(The core answer is “spending time with my family,” which is the subject of the answer and is not
part of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “makes.”)
(A resposta central é “passar tempo com a minha família”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz parte da
pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “makes”, deixa.)

There are so many people here. What’s happening?


Tem tanta gente aqui. O que está acontecendo?

A music festival (is happening here).


Um festival de música (está acontecendo aqui).

(The core answer is “a music festival,” which is the subject of the answer and is not part
of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “is.”)
(A resposta central é “um festival de música”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz parte
da pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “is”, está.)

What’s bothering them?


O que está incomodando eles?

Not having money to pay their bills (is bothering them).


Não ter dinheiro para pagar as suas contas (está incomodando eles).

(The core answer is “not having money to pay their bills,” which is the subject of the answer and is
not part of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “is.”)
(A resposta central é “não ter dinheiro para pagar suas contas”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz
parte da pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “is”, está.)

< voltar para o índice


263
Let’s take a closer look and analyze the structure of the examples
we have previously seen.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT

(1) (2) (3)


What + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement (if necessary)

(1) (2) (3)


What makes you happy?

(1) (2)
What’s happening?

(1) (2) (3)


What’s bothering them?

If you want to ask a more specific question using what, place a noun right after
the question word.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Noun + Interrogative Form

What time do you usually wake up?


A que horas você geralmente acorda?
(What + time = used to ask about the hour)

What kind of music do you like?


De que tipo de música você gosta?
(What + kind = used to ask about the specific type of a thing)

What size do you need?


De que tamanho você precisa?
(What + size = used to ask about size)

< voltar para o índice


264
There are still some special cases, such as what + about. It is used
to make an offer or to ask about your opinion or how you feel about
something.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Special Cases – What About

What about going to the movies?


Que tal irmos ao cinema?

Great idea.
Ótima ideia.

How are you?


Como vai você?

I’m fine, thanks. What about you?


Eu estou bem. E você?

In informal conversations, there are some common


expressions with the question word what.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Expressions

What’s up?
E aí?

What now?
O que agora?

< voltar para o índice


265
The question word what can also be used in exclamations to express surprise,
shock, or emotions. In this case, we use: what + an article + (an adjective) + a
noun. We may or may not include the adjective, but the noun must always be
there in exclamations with what.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Exclamations

Structure: What + Article + (Adjective) + Noun

What a (beautiful) place!


Que lugar (bonito)!
(What + Article “a” + (Adjective “beautiful”) + Noun “place”)

What a great song!


Que música ótima!
(What + Article “a” + Adjective “great” + Noun “song”)

What a ( nice) gesture!


Que gesto (legal)!
(What + Article “a” + (Adjective “nice”) + Noun “gesture)

What a song!
Que música!
(What + Article “a” + Noun “song”)

Now you know different ways in which you can use the question word what, the structure used
with different verb forms, as well as how to use it in exclamations and expressions.

< voltar para o índice


266
Question Word -
When
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common
question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how.
On this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the question word when, which is used
to ask or to explain at what occasion or moment something takes place.

QUESTION WORD - WHEN

When
Quando

Check out some examples of when used in direct and indirect questions:

QUESTION WORD – WHEN


Direct and Indirect Questions

When are you traveling?


Quando você viaja?
(Direct Question: When + Structure of the Interrogative Form)

Tell me when you are going to travel.


Me diga quando você vai viajar.
(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)

Could you tell me when you are going to travel?


Você poderia me dizer quando você vai viajar?
(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)

In general, the structure to make these interrogative sentences is the question


word when followed by the structure of the interrogative form, which can be
used with different verb forms.

< voltar para o índice


267
In the simple forms, when the verb to be is the main verb of the sentence, there is no auxiliary.
For all the other verbs, you’ll need the auxiliary verb to make an interrogative sentence.

QUESTION WORD – WHEN


Simple Forms – Simple Present and Simple Past

Structure: When + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement

When are you free?


Quando você está livre?
(are = simple present)

When was she born?


Quando ela nasceu?
(was = simple past)

Structure: When + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form +
Complement (if necessary)

When does she have English classes?


Quando ela tem aulas de inglês?
(does = auxiliary for the simple present)

When did you start college?


Quando você começou a faculdade?
(did = auxiliary for the simple past)

We can use when with continuous forms such as the present continuous to
indicate actions in the future.

QUESTION WORD – WHEN


Continuous Forms

Structure: When + Verb To Be + Subject + Main Verb in the –ING Form +


Complement (if necessary)

When are you moving to Italy?


Quando você se mudará para a Itália?

< voltar para o índice


268
The same happens with perfect forms. It’s important to notice, though, that most
perfect forms do not refer to a specific point in time, so questions with perfect
forms are usually accompanied by an adverb of time. Check out the examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHEN


Perfect Forms

PRESENT PERFECT
Structure: When + Verb To Have + Subject +
Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)

When has she ever helped her parents?


Quando na vida ela ajudou seus pais?
(Rhetorical question reinforced by the adverb “ever”)

PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS


Structure: When + Verb To Have + Subject + Been +
Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)

Since when have you been studying?


Desde quando você está estudando?
(The adverb “since” is used to ask about a starting point)

It’s important to notice that if we want to ask about the specific


time when an activity or event starts or ends, the preferred
question is “what time” and not “when.”

QUESTION WORDS
Specific Time

What time did you leave work yesterday?


A que horas você saiu do trabalho ontem?

When did you leave work yesterday?


Quando você saiu do trabalho ontem?

And now you know what a question word is and how to use the question
word when with different verb forms.

< voltar para o índice


269
Question Word -
Where
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common question
words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how. On this grammar
guide, we’ll focus on the question word where.
Where is used to ask questions about place.

QUESTION WORD - WHERE

Where
Onde/Aonde

The question word where can be used in direct and indirect questions.

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Direct and Indirect Questions

Where is the subway station?


Onde é a estação de metrô?
(Direct Question: Where + Structure of the Interrogative Form)

I am asking you where the subway station is.


Eu estou te perguntando onde fica a estação de metrô.
(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)

Direct questions with where will follow the same pattern, regardless of the
verb form. The structure will be the question word where followed by the
interrogative form.

< voltar para o índice


270
Take a look at the structure to use where with the simple present. Note that when
the main verb is the verb to be, there is no auxiliary verb. For all other verbs, the
auxiliary is necessary.

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Where + Interrogative

SIMPLE PRESENT

Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)

Where are you?


Onde você está?

Structure: Where + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where do you work? Where does she work?


Onde você trabalha? Onde ela trabalha?

Questions with where in the simple past follow the same pattern of the simple
present. The only difference is that you’ll conjugate the verb to be or the auxiliary
verb in the past

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Where + Interrogative

SIMPLE PAST

Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)

Where were you?


Onde você estava?

Structure: Where + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where did you go? Where did he go?


Aonde você foi? Aonde ele foi?

< voltar para o índice


271
The question word where can also be used with continuous forms such as the
present and the past continuous.

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Continuous Forms
Where + Interrogative Form

PRESENT AND PAST

Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject +


Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where are you going?


Aonde você está indo?

Where were you going last night when I arrived?


Aonde você estava indo ontem à noite quando cheguei?

It is possible to use where with perfect forms such as the present


perfect and the present perfect continuous.

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Perfect Forms
Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous

PRESENT PERFECT

A past action that is still relevant.


Uma ação passada que ainda é relevante.

Structure: Where + Verb To Have + Subject +


Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)

Where have you been?


Por onde você esteve?

< voltar para o índice


272
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS

Action started in the past and still going on.


Ação iniciada no passado que ainda está acontecendo.

Structure: Where + Verb To Have + Subject + Been +


Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where have you been working?


Onde você tem trabalhado?

Modal verbs can be used in questions with where. In this case, the modal verb
comes right after the question word.

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Modal Verbs

Structure: Where + Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form +
Complement (if necessary)

Where should we go on our next vacation?


Aonde devemos ir em nossas próximas férias?
(should = recommendation)

Where would you like to live?


Onde você gostaria de viver?
(would = hypothetical question)

Where can we find an ATM machine?


Onde podemos encontrar um caixa eletrônico?
(can = possibility)

In English, it is common to use where with verbs followed by prepositions that


express directions. When we use these prepositions, they are placed right after
the verb.
Two frequent prepositions used in questions with where are “to” and “from,”
since they typically follow verbs that express movement.

< voltar para o índice


273
Check out some questions with the verbs to go and to come followed by these prepositions.

QUESTION WORD – WHERE


Where + Verbs Followed by Prepositions

Where are you going (to)?


Para onde você está indo? / Aonde você está indo?

(The preposition is optional because the verb to go expresses movement toward a place
with or without the preposition.)
(A preposição é opcional porque ir o verbo ir indica movimento em direção a algum lugar,
com ou sem preposição.)

Where is she coming from?


De onde ela está vindo?

(The preposition is mandatory, otherwise the verb to come might not imply the idea of origin.)
(A preposição é obrigatória, caso contrário, o verbo vir pode não transmitir a ideia de origem.)

And now you know what a question word is and how to use the question
word where to ask indirect or direct questions with different verb forms.

< voltar para o índice


274
Question Word -
Which
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. On this grammar
guide, we’ll talk about the question word which.
We use which to ask about specific information. As in some contexts which will
be interchangeable with the question word what, it’s important to highlight the
difference between these two question words.
The most important feature of which is that it’s used when there’s a limited
number of choices in mind.

QUESTION WORDS
What vs. Which

What’s your phone number?


Qual é o seu telefone?
(There are many possibilities. Country code, area code,
and several possible combinations of numbers.)

Which size do you want?


Que tamanho você quer?
(There are limited options, such as small, medium, or large.)

In English, when we ask direct questions with both which and what, it’s possible to use a noun
after the question word to make the question more specific.
Again, you’ll choose to use one or the other based on the range of options. Take a look at the
examples.

QUESTION WORDS
Which vs. What

I bought white and grey paint. Which color will you choose for your bedroom?
Eu comprei tinta branca e cinza. Qual cor você vai escolher para o seu quarto?
(Limited options = only two colors available: white and grey)

< voltar para o índice


275
I’m trying to decide on the new color of our bedroom walls. What colors do you like?
Eu estou tentando decidir a cor das paredes do nosso quarto. De quais cores você gosta?
(Broader option = from all the colors, you can choose the ones you like)

Which can also be followed by a pronoun, usually because you don’t want to repeat the
options you have just given, and in such case, we’ll frequently use the pronoun one.

QUESTION WORD – WHICH


Which + Pronoun

Structure: Which + Pronoun + Interrogative Form

Mr. Brown and Ms. Davenport are my favorite teachers.


O Sr. Brown e a Sra. Davenport são meus professores favoritos.

OK. But which one do you like the most?


OK. Mas de qual deles você gosta mais?
(Replace “teacher” with “one” since the teachers were already mentioned.)

We can also use an object pronoun or a determiner right after


which, but in such case we’ll use which of. Check the examples.

QUESTION WORD – WHICH


Which of

Which of us is going to sleep in the bigger bed?


Qual de nós vai dormir na cama maior?

Which of these jackets is yours?


Qual dessas jaquetas é sua?

< voltar para o índice


276
The question word which can be used in direct and indirect questions. In direct questions, it
follows the interrogative form and structure, whereas in indirect questions we are reporting the
question or there’s a question within another question.

QUESTION WORD – WHICH


Direct and Indirect Questions

Which dress do you prefer? The pink or the green?


Qual vestido você prefere? O rosa ou o verde?
(Direct Question: Which + Structure of the Interrogative Form)

Can you give me some suggestions on which museums I should visit in Berlin?
Você pode me dar algumas sugestões de quais museus eu devo visitar em Berlim?
(Indirect Question: Which + Structure of the Affirmative Form)

Now you know how to ask questions using the question word which, and know the
difference between what and which, their use and structure.

< voltar para o índice


277
Question Word –
Who
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. The question word
who is used to ask questions about people.

Question Word—W ho
Direct and Indirect Questions

Who is that girl?


Quem é aquela garota?
(Direct question = who + structure of interrogative form)

Tell me who that girl is.


Diga-me que é essa garota.
(Indirect question = who + structure of affirmative form)

As with all question words, the most frequent structure to ask a direct question is
the question word followed by the interrogative form in different verb forms.
In the simple present, when we use who with the verb to be, we do not use an
auxiliary verb.

WHO – SIMPLE PRESENT


To be

Who is your favorite singer?


Quem é o seu cantor favorito?
(Simple Present + To be = No auxiliary)

< voltar para o índice


278
With all the other verbs in all other verb forms, we need to use an auxiliary verb in the interrogative form. But
when we ask questions with the question word who, we have to pay special attention to this structure.
The question word who is always used to ask about the identification of a person. However, it is possible to
ask about the subject or the object of the sentence. This is important because the structure of the question
will change.
Take a look:
When we ask about the subject, the main verb is conjugated in third person singular. Pay attention to the
structure of the interrogative sentence:

WHO – SIMPLE PRESENT


Questions about the subject

Structure: Who + Verb in the third person singular + Complement

Who helps you with the kids?


Quem te ajuda com as crianças?
(Who + verb in the third person singular “helps” + complement “you with the kids”)

My mom helps me with the kids.


Minha mãe me ajuda com as crianças.
(Subject “my mom” + verb in the affirmative “helps” + complement “me with the kids”)
(The core of the answer is the subject “My mom.”)
(A parte central da resposta é o sujeito “Minha mãe”.)

When we ask questions to learn about the object of a sentence, then the subject is included in the question,
and we will use who followed by the structure of the interrogative form.

WHO – SIMPLE PRESENT


Questions about the object

Structure: Who + Structure of the Interrogative Form

Who do you want to win the elections?


Quem você quer que vença as eleições?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary “do” + Subject “you” + Main Verb “want” + Complement)

I want Michael to win the elections.


Eu quero que o Michael vença as eleições.
(Subject “I” + Verb in the Affirmative “want” + Object “Michael” + Complement “to win the elections”)
(The core of the answer is the object “Michael.”)
(A parte central da resposta é o objeto “Michael”.)

< voltar para o índice


279
In the simple past, we follow the same pattern. The difference here is that the
auxiliary verb in the past is did regardless of the subject.
As with the simple present, if we use the verb to be, we don’t use the auxiliary
verb. We will use was or were, according to the subject.

WHO – SIMPLE PAST


Subject and Object Questions

Who was Anne Frank?


Quem foi Anne Frank?
(Who + Verb To Be)

Who called you?


Quem te ligou?
(Who + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement)

Who did you call?


Para quem você ligou?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb)

In continuous forms such as the present and the past continuous, we’ll use the
question word who followed by the interrogative of these structures.

WHO – CONTINUOUS FORMS


Present and Past Continuous

Who is driving today?


Quem está dirigindo hoje?
(Who + Verb in the third person singular + Complement)

Who were you talking to?


Com quem você estava falando?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary + Subject + Main Verb)

< voltar para o índice


280
With perfect forms, such as the present perfect and the present perfect continuous,
we’ll use the same patterns.

WORD – PERFE CT FORMS


Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous

Who has won the most Oscars?


Quem ganhou mais Oscars?
(Who + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement)

Who have you been seeing?


Com quem você tem saído?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary 1 + Subject + Auxiliary 2 + Main verb)

Who is commonly used with modal verbs. In this case, the modal comes right after the question word.

WHO – MODAL VERBS

Who should we consider for the project? Who can help us?
Quem devemos considerar para o projeto? Quem pode nos ajudar?

Who would you take to a desert island?


Quem você levaria para uma ilha deserta?

You can make questions using who and verbs followed by prepositions. In these cases, the prepositions
go to the end of the sentence.

WHO
Verbs + Prepositions

Who are you going out with? Who did you talk to?
Com quem você vai sair? Com quem você falou?
(I am asking about the person or (In this question, we want to know
people who are joining you.) who that person is.)

And now you know when and how to use who, and you’ve seen its
structure with different verb forms.

< voltar para o índice


281
Question Word
Whose
The question word whose is used to ask which person owns or is responsible
for something, and it differs from the question word who, which is used to
identify people, not ownership.

WHO X WHOSE

Who is that girl? Whose is that girl?


Quem é aquela menina? De quem é aquela menina?

That’s Mary. She’s Meg’s daughter.


Aquela é a Mary Ela é filha da Meg.

It is important to pay special attention to the difference between who’s, which is the contraction of the
question word who and is, or sometimes who and has, and the question word whose. In spoken language,
they may sound similar, but their meaning is different.

WHO’S X WHOSE

Who’s excited about the project? Whose project is this?


Quem está empolgado com o projeto? De quem é esse projeto?
(Who’s = Who + is.) (Whose = to whom the project belongs.)

We can use two different structures to ask


WHOSE
questions with whose. We can place the noun we
are referring to right after the question word or keep
it in its original interrogative position. Both questions Whose purse is this?
have the same meaning. De quem é essa bolsa?

Whose is this purse?


De quem é essa bolsa?

< voltar para o índice


282
Depending on the verb and the speaker’s intention, we can
also use whose with prepositions. They go either before the
question word or at the end of the clause.

WHOSE + PREPOSITIONS

At whose house are you having lunch?


Na casa de quem você vai almoçar?

Whose house are you having lunch at?


Na casa de quem você vai almoçar?

We can ask questions with whose using simple forms.

WHOSE
Simple Forms

Whose car is parked in front of the house?


De quem é o carro que está estacionado em frente à casa?

Whose car was parked in front of the house?


De quem é o carro que estava estacionado em frente à casa?

The question word whose can also be used in continuous forms.

WHOSE
Continuous Forms

Whose kid is running in the rain?


De quem é a criança que está correndo na chuva?

Whose baby was crying earlier?


De quem é o bebê que estava chorando mais cedo?

As whose asks about possession, the answers will include the possessive case, possessive
adjectives, or possessive pronouns. If you want to learn more about how to answer questions with
whose, there are dedicated grammar guides for each of these topics.

< voltar para o índice


283
Question Word –
Why
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common
question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how.
The question word why is used to ask or to talk about the reason for something.

QUESTION WORD – WHY

Why
Por que / Por quê

Just like the other question words, why can be used in direct and indirect
questions.

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Direct and Indirect Questions

Why are you so sad?


Por que você está tão triste?
(Why + interrogative form = direct question)

Please, tell me why you are so sad.


Por favor, me diga por que você está tão triste.
(A question inside a sentence = indirect question)

Most direct questions will follow this pattern: question word why +
interrogative form, no matter which verb form you choose to use.

< voltar para o índice


284
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why + Interrogative Form

Why did you say that?


Por que você disse isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Simple Past)

Why are you doing this?


Por que você está fazendo isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Present Continuous)

Why have you been going there?


Por que você tem ido lá?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Present Perfect Continuous)

Why would I do that?


Por que eu faria isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Modal Verb)

Questions with why can also be followed by a verb in the infinitive without to. This structure
is typically used to suggest that an action is pointless or unnecessary.

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Why + Infinitive Form (without To)

I’ve already told you this movie is terrible. Why waste your time with it?
Eu já te disse que esse filme é horrível. Por que perder seu tempo com isso?
(Why + verb “to waste” in the infinitive without to)

Why argue with Gabriel? He’ll never change his mind.


Por que discutir com o Gabriel? Ele nunca vai mudar de ideia.
(Why + verb “to argue” in the infinitive without to).

< voltar para o índice


285
When we reply to a negative statement and we want to ask the reason, why not sounds more natural than
why. Why not can also be used as a reply when we want to accept a suggestion.

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Why + Not—Replies

Replying to a Negative Statement


Respondendo a uma declaração negativa

I don’t want to go out tonight. Why not?


Eu não quero sair hoje à noite. Por que não?

Replying to a Suggestion or Invitation


Respondendo a uma sugestão ou convite

Let’s order some food and watch a movie at Vamos pedir comida e assistir a um filme em casa.
home. Sure, why not?

It is also possible to use why not when we want to give a suggestion. In this case,
we can use why not + infinitive without to or we can use why + interrogative-
negative form of the simple present.
Check the examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Why + Negative Form—Suggestions

Why not stay home and watch a movie?


Por que não ficar em casa e assistir a um filme?
(In this sentence, “why not” is followed by the verb “to stay”
in the infinitive without to and the complement.)

Why don’t we stay home and watch a movie?


Por que a gente não fica em casa e assiste a um filme?
(In this sentence, “why” is followed by the interrogative-negative
form of the simple present.)

< voltar para o índice


286
It is important to notice that we use why to ask about the reason, and we use
because or because of when we are giving the reason for something in affirmative
sentences.
The difference is that because will be used before a complete sentence, whereas
because of will be followed by a noun or noun phrase.

BE CAUSE VS. BE CAUSE OF

Why are you leaving earlier?


Por que você está saindo mais cedo?

Because I have a doctor’s appointment.


Porque eu tenho uma consulta médica.
(Complete sentence = Because + Subject + Verb + Complement)

Because of my doctor’s appointment.


Por causa da minha consulta médica.
(Because of + Noun Phrase)

Now you know what a question word is, how to use why as a question word
using different verb forms, and how to use because to state reasons.

< voltar para o índice


287
Reflexive Pronouns
Reflexive pronouns are used when the object and the subject of the sentence
refer to the same person or to the same thing.
First, check what is an object pronoun.

OBJE CT PRONOUNS

Mary talked about John for hours.


Mary falou sobre o John por horas.
(Mary performs the action. Therefore, she is the subject of the sentence;
and John, who receives it, is the object.)
(Mary pratica a ação. Portanto, ela é o sujeito da frase;
e John, que recebe a ação, é o objeto.)

Now, imagine, we want to replace the object of the sentence, which is


John, with a pronoun. In this case, we would use an object pronoun, as you
can see in the following sentence.

Mary talked about him for hours.


Mary falou sobre ele por horas.
(Him replaces John, which is the object; so, it is an object pronoun.)
(Ele substitui John, que é o objeto da frase.
Por essa razão, é um object pronoun.)

< voltar para o índice


288
Now, check the reflexive pronoun.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Mary talked about herself for hours.


Mary falou de si mesma por horas.
(Mary performed the action, and she was also the object of the action.)
(Mary praticou a ação, e também foi objeto da ação.)

The person who performs the action, that is, the subject,
is the same person who receives the action: the object.

Finally, pay attention not to confuse reflexive pronouns with object pronouns.

REFLEXIVE PRON OUNS AND OBJE CT PRONOUNS

Reflexive pronoun

Mary talked about herself for hours.


Mary falou de si mesma por horas.
(Mary performed the action and she was also the object of the action.)
(Mary praticou a ação e também foi objeto da ação.)

Object pronoun

Jane was absent and Mary talked about her.


Jane estava ausente, e Mary falou sobre ela.
(Mary talked about another person, Jane. So, we can use the object pronoun her to replace Jane.)
(Mary falou sobre outra pessoa, Jane. Então, podemos usar o object pronoun her para substituir Jane).

The second sentence should be avoided. It sounds ambiguous since two female names were
mentioned before. Still, it’s clear that Mary is not talking about herself, because we used the object
pronoun her and not the reflexive herself.

< voltar para o índice


289
You can see the relation of each subject pronoun to its corresponding reflexive
pronoun on the following table.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Subject Pronoun Reflexive Pronoun

I myself
eu eu mesmo(a)

you yourself
você você mesmo

he himself
Singular ele ele mesmo / si mesmo

she herself
ela ela mesma / si mesma

it itself
ele(a) / isso a si mesmo(a)

we ourselves
nós nós mesmos(as)

you yourselves
Plural vocês vocês mesmos(as)

they themselves
eles/elas eles mesmos/elas mesmas

Now that you know the reflexive pronouns in English, check their use.
We mainly use them when the subject and the object of the sentence
refer to the same person or thing.

< voltar para o índice


290
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

I have to take care of myself.


Eu preciso me cuidar.
(I have to take care of my own.
So, I am both the doer and the beneficiary of the action.)

He cut himself this morning.


Ele se cortou essa manhã.
(He was performing some action when he accidently cut himself.
So, he did it and he was affected by it.)

In some situations, reflexive pronouns are used even if the subject and the
object are not the same but are somehow related.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

Her songs are all about herself.


As músicas dela são todas sobre ela mesma.
(The subject her songs is equivalent to they, but there is a relation
between the possessive adjective her, which is part of the subject, and the
complement herself.)

His dogs bite themselves.


Os cachorros dele se mordem.
(The subject his dogs can be replaced by they. Themselves refers to they.)

We can also use reflexive pronouns to emphasize the subject of the sentence. In this case, they
are not the object of the action, and they can be removed from the sentence without changing the
meaning. But if we decide to use it, we should place the reflexive right after the subject or at the
end of the sentence.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

I myself agree with that.


I agree with that.
Eu mesmo(a) concordo com isso.
Eu concordo com isso.
(Here, I am emphasizing that it’s my opinion.)

< voltar para o índice


291
It’s important to mention that when we use the preposition by followed by a
reflexive pronoun, we mean alone or without help.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

I like to be by myself.
Eu gosto de ficar sozinho(a).
(It means that I like to be alone.)

I’m so proud of him. He did it all by himself.


Estou tão orgulhoso(a) dele. Ele fez tudo isso sozinho.
(In this case, he didn’t have any help.)

There are some special cases in which reflexive


pronouns can be used in some specific questions,
replacing the object pronoun.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

How are you?


Como você está?

I’m good, what about yourself?


Eu estou bem, e você?

Now you know what a reflexive pronoun is and how to use it.

< voltar para o índice


292
Regular Verbs
In English, verbs can be either regular or irregular.
Most verbs are regular, that is to say that both their past and past participle will
follow a general rule for regular verbs, which is to add -ED to the base form.

RE GUL AR VERBS
General rule add -ED

to call (called) to finish (finished)


chamar, telefonar acabar, terminar

to help (helped) to listen (listened)


ajudar ouvir

to look (looked) to need ( needed)


olhar, parecer precisar

to play ( played) to show (showed)


brincar, jogar, tocar mostrar

to start (started) to visit (visited)


começar visitar

to want (wanted) to work (worked)


querer trabalhar

< voltar para o índice


293
However, there are some specific spelling rules depending
on how the base form ends.
For regular verbs that already end in -E, we just add -D.

RE GUL AR VERBS
For verbs ending in -E, add -D

Infinitive Form: to arrive (chegar)


You’ve arrived early.
Você chegou cedo.

Infinitive Form: to live ( morar)


I lived in London when I was a child.
Eu morei em Londres quando eu era criança.

Infinitive Form: to introduce (apresentar)


I’ve introduced Julia to Mark.
Eu apresentei a Julia ao Mark.

Infinitive Form: to like (gostar)


I liked this book very much.
Eu gostei muito desse livro.

For regular verbs that end with a consonant followed by the letter
Y, we drop the -Y, and add -IED.

RE GUL AR VERBS
Verbs ending with a consonant followed by Y, add -IED

Infinitive Form: to study (estudar)


Michelle has studied a lot for her math exam.
Michelle estudou muito para sua prova de matemática.

Infinitive Form: to cry (chorar)


The baby cried a lot last night.
O bebê chorou muito noite passada.

Infinitive Form: to try (tentar)


I tried to help her, but I couldn’t.
Eu tentei ajudá-la, mas não consegui.

< voltar para o índice


294
When the regular verb ends in the combination of consonant, vowel, consonant
(CVC) and the last syllable is stressed, we double the final consonant and add
-ED to form the past.

RE GUL AR VERBS
Verbs ending in CVC: double the last consonant and add -ED

Infinitive Form: to stop ( parar)


We stopped at the drugstore to buy some things.
Nós paramos na farmácia para comprar algumas coisas.

Infinitive Form: to plan ( planejar)


We had planned to arrive early, but we are late.
Nós tínhamos planejado chegar cedo, mas estamos atrasados.

Infinitive Form: to prefer ( preferir)


Tony preferred to stay home last night.
Tony preferiu ficar em casa noite passada.

Infinitive Form: to occur (ocorrer)


Something unexpected has occurred.
Algo inesperado ocorreu.

Pay attention to the fact that there are also verbs ending in the combination consonant + vowel + consonant
in which the last consonant is L.
In British English, these verbs, regardless of the stressed syllable, will always have their past and past
particle forms with double L. Therefore, travelled with double L or traveled with one L are both correct
spellings of the past of the verb to travel. The same happens with the verb to cancel.

RE GUL AR VERBS
Verbs ending in CVC in which the last consonant is L: add -ED or double the L and add -ED

British English: Double the L and add -ED


American English: Add -ED

Infinitive Form: to travel (viajar)


I travelled/traveled to Paris in my honeymoon.
Eu viajei para Paris em minha lua de mel.

Infinitive Form: to cancel (cancelar)


The flight has been cancelled/canceled due to bad weather conditions.
O vôo foi cancelado devido ao mau tempo.

< voltar para o índice


295
For verbs ending in -C, we’ll add -KED to form the past and past participle.
These are rarer cases, but, among the most frequent verbs in the English
language, we could mention the verb to panic.

RE GUL AR VERBS
Verbs ending in –C: add -KED

Infinitive Form: to panic (entrar em pânico)


I panicked when I saw my bank balance.
Eu entrei em pânico quando vi meu saldo bancário.

And now you know how to use the regular verbs in the
past and the past participle.

< voltar para o índice


296
Relative Pronouns
Relative pronouns are used to avoid repetitions, and they introduce relative
clauses. There are several relative pronouns, but the way we use them to connect
sentences is similar.
The relative pronoun who is used to refer to people. Imagine we know two
pieces of information about Claire.

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHO


People

(1)
Claire has been my friend since we were kids.
A Claire é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.

(2)
Claire is currently working as a consultant.
A Claire está atualmente trabalhando como consultora.

Notice that the subject in both sentences is Claire. Therefore, when we combine
both sentences into one, we can replace the noun that is repeated, in this case,
Claire, by the relative pronoun who, which is placed immediately after the noun
it is replacing in the sentence.
We can start with the piece of information we want between commas.
1. Claire, who has been my friend since we were kids, is currently working as a
consultant.
2. Claire, who is working as a consultant, has been my friend since we were kids.

< voltar para o índice


297
Notice that who refers to Claire, as it is replacing this term in the sentence that brings an additional piece of
information.

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHO


People

(1)
Claire has been my friend since we were kids.
A Claire é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.

(2)
Claire is currently working as a consultant.
A Claire está atualmente trabalhando como consultora.

(1) (2) (1)


Claire, who is working as a consultant, has been my friend since we were kids.
A Claire, que está atualmente trabalhando como consultora, é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.

Who can also refer to groups of people, such as committee, police, team, among others.

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHO


Groups of People

If there’s a fire, you should call the fire brigade, who deals with this kind of accident.
Se houver um incêndio, você deve chamar a brigada de incêndio, que lida com este tipo de acidente.
(Fire brigade consists of a group of people).

If the relative pronoun refers to things, for example, we’ll use the relative pronoun which. It won’t matter if it’s
being used as the subject or the object of the verb in the sentence. Take a look:

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHICH


Things: Subject or Object

(1) (2)
Soccer is the world’s most popular sport. I don’t like soccer.
O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo. Eu não gosto de futebol.

< voltar para o índice


298
If we replace soccer for the relative pronoun in the sentence where it is the subject, the relative
pronoun should be placed right after soccer in the sentence where it is the object, check it out:

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHICH


Things: Subject or Object

(1)
Soccer is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo.

(2)
I don’t like soccer.
Eu não gosto de futebol.

(2) (1)
I don’t like soccer, which is the world’s most popular sport.
Eu não gosto de futebol, que é o esporte mais popular do mundo.

But if we wish to replace it in the sentence where soccer is the object of the verb, it goes like:

RE L ATIVE PRONOUN – WHICH


Things: Subject or Object

(1)
Soccer is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo.

(2)
I don’t like soccer.
Eu não gosto de futebol.

(1) (2) (1)


Soccer, which I don’t like, is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol, do qual eu não gosto, é o esporte mais popular do mundo.

< voltar para o índice


299
Notice that the relative pronoun which comes right after the noun it’s replacing.
Now that we have seen how to form sentences using the relative pronouns who and which,
we have to take a closer look at the meaning of the sentences. Check the following pair of
sentences, which contain a repetition:

REL ATIVE PRONOUNS


Non-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause

(1) (2)
I’m going to travel with my sister. My sister is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã. Minha irmã está de férias.

We can join these sentences using the relative pronoun who with a coma right
before it, or without a coma, depending on what we mean.

REL ATIVE PRONOUNS


Non-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause

I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.


Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.

I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.


Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.

This not just a punctuation choice. There’s a considerable difference in meaning


between these two sentences.
The one with a comma is a non-restrictive clause. That means, for example, that I
only have one sister and my listener or reader knows that. So, I don’t need to specify
which of my sisters I’m talking about. This is why I used the comma: because this is
a non-restrictive clause, also called a non-defining clause. If I only have one sister,
the fact that she is on vacation is only extra information.

< voltar para o índice


300
The second sentence is known as restrictive or defining clause. Imagine I have three sisters and one of them
is on vacation. If I say, “I’m going to travel with my sister,” I need to be more specific and define which of them
I am talking about, so I say, “I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.” The clause with the relative
pronoun defines which of my sisters is traveling with me.

REL ATIVE PRONOUNS


Non-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause

I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.


Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.
(Non-restrictive clause: I only have one sister, so I don’t need to specify which sister I’m talking about).
(Oração não restritiva: eu só tenho uma irmã, então, não preciso especificar de qual irmã estou falando).

I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.


Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.
(Restrictive clause: I have three sisters and only one of them is on vacation).
(Oração restritiva: Eu tenho três irmãs, e só uma delas está de férias).

It is important to identify restrictive and non-restrictive clauses because, as


mentioned before, the meaning of sentences with restrictive or non-restrictive
clauses is different. Besides that, we can replace the relative pronouns who and
which with the relative pronoun that, but only in restrictive clauses.
Let’s use the same sentences we’ve seen before and check how we can do that:

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – THAT


Restrictive Clauses

Non-restrictive Clause
I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.
I’m going to travel with my sister, that is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.

Restrictive Clause
I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.
I’m going to travel with my sister that is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.

< voltar para o índice


301
Whenever that is used as a relative pronoun, there will never be a comma before
it, because it can only be used in restrictive clauses. The relative pronoun that can
replace either which or who, so it can refer to both people and things.
There are other relative pronouns, such as where and when. They’ll replace the
adverb of place and the adverb of time respectively. But both of them can be
replaced by preposition + which.

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHERE


Places

I know a great restaurant where we can eat.


Eu conheço um ótimo restaurante onde nós podemos comer.

I know a great restaurant at which we can eat.


Eu conheço um ótimo restaurante no qual nós podemos comer.

The same happens with the relative pronoun when. We can use it as a relative
pronoun that gives a time reference, or as a preposition followed by which to convey
the same meaning in a formal structure.

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHEN


Dates

There isn’t a day when I don’t remember my childhood.


Não tem um dia em que eu não me lembre da minha infância.

There isn’t a day in which I don’t remember my childhood.


Não tem um dia em que eu não me lembre da minha infância.

Another important relative pronoun is whose. It is used to refer to possession by


people, things, or animals. It will replace a repetition imposed by the genitive case
or by possessive pronouns and adjectives. For example, let’s suppose we have
these two pieces of information:

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSE


Possession

(1) (2)
Tina called me last night. Tina’s sister works with me.
A Tina me ligou ontem à noite. A irmã da Tina trabalha comigo.

< voltar para o índice


302
We could put the sentences together by using the relative pronoun whose
to indicate the fact that Tina has a sister that works with me. Notice that the
apostrophe + S has been replaced with the relative pronoun whose to indicate
possession.

REL ATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSE


Possession

(1) (2) (1)


Tina, whose sister works with me, called me last night.
Tina, cuja irmã trabalha comigo, me ligou ontem à noite.

Now you know it’s possible to avoid repetition


using relative pronouns in English.

< voltar para o índice


303
Simple Past –
Other Verbs
The simple past is a verb form used to talk about things that happened or existed in
the past.
Check the structures, starting with affirmative sentences in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Main Verb (in the Past) + Complement

I watched all the episodes of this series.


Eu assisti a todos os episódios desta série.
(I performed this action in the past. It’s over now because I finished it).

In affirmative sentences, the auxiliary verb is not necessary, but it can be used in some
specific contexts to emphasize the message.
If we decide to use the auxiliary did to add emphasis to affirmative sentences, the main verb
goes back to its base form.

SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Sentences – Adding Emphasis

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary Verb (in the Past) +


Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I did watch all the episodes of this series.


Eu (de fato) assisti a todos os episódios desta série.
(Note that the auxiliary doesn’t have a meaning, only the function of emphasizing).

< voltar para o índice


304
The verb conjugation in the simple past will be the same for all persons, singular or plural.
What we must take into consideration, though, is that some verbs in English are regular, while
others are irregular.
In the previous example in the affirmative form, we used the regular verb to watch in the past,
which is watched.
For regular verbs, we’ll add -D, -ED, or -IED to the end, depending on how the base form is
spelled. Check the spelling rules for regular verbs in the past.

SIMPLE PAST – RE GUL AR VERBS


Spelling Rules

GENERAL RULE: ADD -ED

To watch – watched To play – played


Assistir Brincar, jogar, tocar

VERBS ENDING IN -E: ADD -D

To like – liked To love – loved


Gostar Amar

VERBS ENDING IN CONSONANT + -Y: DROP THE -Y AND ADD -IED

To study – studied To cry – cried


Estudar Chorar

CVC VERBS: DOUBLE THE LAST CONSONANT AND ADD -ED

To stop – stopped To plan – planned


Parar Planejar

< voltar para o índice


305
These are the spelling rules for all regular verbs in the past, which are most
verbs in English.
But there are few irregular verbs in English, and they do deserve some special
attention. As the name says, they are irregular, which means there is not one
pattern that applies to all of them.
For instance, some irregular verbs suffer significant changes in their base
forms. That’s the case of the verb to be, which in the past becomes was or were
depending on the subject, or the verb to have, which becomes had, and the verb
to go, which becomes went. On the other hand, verbs such as to quit, to put, or
to cut will keep their base form when conjugated in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Irregular Verbs

To be – was/were To quit – quit


Ser, estar Desistir

To have – had To cut – cut


Ter Cortar

To go – went To put – put


Ir Botar, colocar

There’s a grammar guide dedicated to irregular verbs in the past. Check it so you can learn
more about them.
Now, when using sentences in the negative and in the interrogative forms, the fact that the
verbs can be either regular or irregular is unimportant, since it’s the auxiliary verb did that
will be conjugated. This means that the main verb goes back to its base form.

SIMPLE PAST
Negative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I didn’t watch this series.


Eu não assisti a esta série.
(didn’t = did not)

< voltar para o índice


306
The contracted form didn’t will be used in most cases. However, in formal
written language, it is advisable to avoid the use of the contraction. In spoken
language, if you use the full form, you are adding emphasis to a negative
statement.

SIMPLE PAST
Negative Sentences – Adding Emphasis

I did not watch this series.


Eu não assisti a esta série.

For interrogative sentences, we’ll invert the order and place the auxiliary before the subject.

SIM PLE PAST


Interrogative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

Did you watch all the episodes of the final season?


Você assistiu a todos os episódios da temporada final?

Now that we’ve seen the simple past in the affirmative form and the spelling
rules for regular verbs, as well as the structures of negative and interrogative
sentences, it’s time to see its common usages.
We use the simple past to talk about definite time in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Uses

I graduated in December.
Eu me formei em dezembro.
(“To graduate” is a regular verb, and its past form is “graduated”)

We went to the movies yesterday.


Nós fomos ao cinema ontem.
(“To go” is an irregular verb, and its past form is “went”)

< voltar para o índice


307
The simple past may or may not have an explicit time reference.
Either way, it refers to past events.

SIMPLE PAST
Uses

Anne studied with me.


A Anne estudou comigo.
(No time reference: but it’s still a finished action in past)

Santos Dumont flew around the Eiffel Tower.


Santos Dumont voou em volta da Torre Eiffel.
(No time reference: but it’s still a finished action in past)

We can use the simple past to talk about events that happened once or events that happened
with some frequency in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Uses

I went to Italy for my 15th birthday.


Eu fui para a Itália no meu aniversário de 15 anos.
(The trip to Italy is an isolated event that happened because of my 15th birthday).

Every summer I traveled with my family to Italy.


Todo verão eu viajava com minha família para a Itália.
(The trip to Italy was something that happened more frequently, every summer.)

< voltar para o índice


308
When we want to make it clearer that we are talking about a past habit, something that
happened frequently in the past, it’s also possible to use the expression used to followed
by a main verb.

USED TO
Frequent Events in the Past

Structure: Subject + Used to + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I used to travel to Italy every summer.


Eu costumava viajar para a Itália todo verão.
(Used to + Main Verb in the Base Form = frequent events or habits in the past)

Now you know when and why we use the simple past with other verbs,
as well as its structures and spelling rules.

< voltar para o índice


309
Simple Present -
Other Verbs
The simple present was divided into two grammar guides, and we did that
because there is an important difference in structure.
In this grammar guide, we’ll talk about the simple present with verbs that are not
the verb to be, that is, all the other verbs.
When we use the verb to be, we do not use an auxiliary verb to make interrogative
and negative sentences. But when we use other verbs, we need to use the
auxiliary verb. The auxiliary verb for the simple present is do or does, according to
the subject.
Check out the difference in the box.

SIMPLE PRESENT

Verb To Be Other Verbs

Interrogative Is she a teacher? Does she work as a teacher?


Ela é professora? Ela trabalha como professora?

Negative She isn’t a teacher. She doesn’t work as a teacher.


Ela não é professora. Ela não trabalha como professora.

The basic structure for the affirmative form is the SVC structure, that is, subject,
main verb, and complement. And the verb conjugation works like this: we’ll use the
base form of the verb for all persons, except for the third person singular. In this
case, we’ll add –S, –ES, or –IES to the end of the verb, depending on how it’s spelled.

< voltar para o índice


310
If you want to learn more about the third person spelling rules, you can check the grammar
guide on this topic. However, most verbs will only take a final S in the third person singular,
as you can see in the following table.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Affirmative Form

Singular Plural

I work here. We work here.


First person
Eu trabalho aqui. Nós trabalhamos aqui.

You work here. You work here.


Second person
Você trabalha aqui. Vocês trabalham aqui.

He works here.
Ele trabalha aqui.

She works here. They work here.


Third person
Ela trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas trabalham aqui.

It works for now.


Isso funciona por enquanto.

Notice that we do not use the auxiliary verb in the affirmative form. But it’s possible to use it to
add emphasis to a statement. In that case, the auxiliary verb is placed before the main verb.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Affirmative Form: Adding Emphasis

Usage of the Auxiliary Do

I do have the right to speak my mind.


Eu tenho (sim) o direito de dar minha opinião.

(The verb “do” is used as an auxiliary. So it does not have a meaning, but a function).
(O verbo “do” é usado como auxiliar. Portanto, não tem um significado, mas uma função).

< voltar para o índice


311
Thus, it is possible to use the auxiliary with the simple present in the affirmative form, but it’s also important
to notice that it adds emphasis to the sentence, which means that it is only going to happen in very specific
contexts.
As for the negative and interrogative forms, the auxiliary do is not optional, it’s necessary.
The basic structure for the negative form is the subject, the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to the
subject, the negative particle not, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.
You should pay close attention to the third person singular. In both negative and interrogative forms, the
conjugation goes in the auxiliary verb, that is, we will use does, and, because of that, the main verb goes
back to its base form.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Negative Form

Singular Plural

I don’t work here. We don’t work here.


First person
Eu não trabalho aqui. Nós não trabalhamos aqui.

You don’t work here. You don’t work here.


Second person
Você não trabalha aqui. Vocês não trabalham aqui.

He doesn’t work here.


Ele não trabalha aqui.

She doesn’t work here. They don’t work here.


Third person
Ela não trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas não trabalham aqui.

It doesn’t work for now.


(Isso) não funciona por enquanto.

In informal language, the contracted


forms don’t (do + not) or doesn’t SIMPLE PRESENT
(does + not) are used in most cases. Negative Form: Adding Emphasis
In formal written language, we avoid
using contractions. Do Not Use the Contracted Form
On the other hand, in spoken
language, if we use the full form, You do not have the right to shout at people.
it probably means we want to add Você não tem o direito de gritar com as pessoas.
emphasis to a negative statement.

< voltar para o índice


312
The basic interrogative form structure in the simple present is the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to
the subject, the subject, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.
So the position of the auxiliary verb and the subject is inverted, and, once again, in the third person singular,
the main verb goes back to its base form, and the auxiliary verb is conjugated.
Check out the following table:

SIMPLE PRESENT
Interrogative Form

Singular Plural

Do I work here? Do we work here?


First person
Eu trabalho aqui? Nós trabalhamos aqui?

Do you work here? Do you work here?


Second person
Você trabalha aqui? Vocês trabalham aqui?

Does he work here?


Ele trabalha aqui?

Does she work here? Do they work here?


Third person
Ela trabalha aqui? Eles/Elas trabalham aqui?

Does it work for now?


Isso funciona por enquanto?

The simple present is used to talk SIMPLE PRESENT


about facts and to show repetitions, Other Verbs – Uses
habits, or generalizations.

I work at a law firm.


Eu trabalho em um escritório de advocacia.

She works a lot.


Ela trabalha muito.

< voltar para o índice


313
It can also be used to present a series of events when we narrate
something or give instructions and directions.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses

First you read the questions, then you have to mark the correct statement.
Primeiro você lê as perguntas, depois você tem que marcar a afirmação correta.

You go straight and turn right on the traffic light.


Você segue em frente e vira à direita no semáforo.

The simple present can convey the idea of immediacy and drama, and that’s why it’s commonly
used in stories or novels, in sports broadcasting, and in newspaper headlines, even when
reporting past events.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses

She crosses the street toward him, looks back, and decides to let it go.
Ela atravessa a rua em direção a ele, olha para trás e decide deixar para lá.

He gets the ball, passes through the defense and shoots, but the goalkeeper saves it.
Ele pega a bola, passa pela defesa e chuta, mas o goleiro agarra.

Firefighters save many lives in Brooklyn.


Os bombeiros salvam muitas vidas no Brooklyn.

< voltar para o índice


314
In English, some verbs cannot be used in continuous forms. These verbs are
called non-progressive verbs, and we use them in the simple present. This
group is divided into different subgroups of verbs.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Non-progressive Verbs

Mental process verbs

know, suppose, think, understand


saber, supor, achar, entender

Verbs that express feelings

admire, adore, hate, like, respect


admirar, adorar, detestar, gostar, respeitar

Verbs that describe senses

smell, taste, hear


sentir cheiro, sentir sabor, ouvir

Speech act verbs

promise, swear, agree, deny


prometer, jurar, concordar, negar

And now you know the structure and the most common uses of the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


315
Simple Present -
Verb To Be
The simple present is used to talk about factual information or things
that happen regularly.

SIMPLE PRESENT

This wall is white.


Esta parede é branca.
(It’s a factual piece of information.)

I sleep for 8 or 9 hours a day.


Eu durmo de 8 a 9 horas por dia.
(It’s part of a routine, something I do every day.)

The simple present will be tackled in two different grammar guides.


In this one, we’ll focus on the simple present sentences in which the
main verb is the verb to be.
Check the following table to see the conjugation of the verb to be in
the simple present.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be

Singular Plural
First person I am We are
Second person You are You are
Third person He/She/It is They are

< voltar para o índice


316
There is a different sentence structure for the interrogative, negative, and
affirmative forms. In affirmative sentences, we’ll frequently use the SVC
structure, that is, Subject, Verb, and Complement. To make a negative
statement, you’ll place the negative particle not after the verb. And to ask a
question, we invert the order and place the verb before the subject.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be

Affirmative
Subject + Verb To Be + Complement

I’m a writer.
Eu sou escritor.

Negative
Subject + Verb To Be + NOT + Complement

I am not a writer.
Eu não sou escritor.

Interrogative
Verb To Be + Subject + Complement

Are you a writer?


Você é escritor?

The simple present of the verb to be is commonly


SIMPLE PRESENT
used in its contracted form, also known as short
Verb To Be – Contracted Form
form. Contractions are considered informal, and they
are very common in everyday situations. However,
if you want to sound more formal or more emphatic, Affirmative Negative
use the full form. I’m I’m not
The short or contracted forms can be used in You’re You aren’t
affirmative or negative sentences. He’s/She’s/It’s He/She/It isn’t
We’re We aren’t
They’re They aren’t

< voltar para o índice


317
Now that you know the conjugation in the plural and singular forms, its structure
for affirmative, negative, and interrogative sentences, as well as its full and
contracted forms, check out the possible uses of the verb to be in the simple
present.
It can be used to refer to personal information such as name, age, profession,
marital status, and nationality.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

Name
I am Sophie. My name is Sophie.
Eu sou Sophie. O meu nome é Sophie.

Profession Age
I am an architect. I am 36 years old.
Eu sou arquiteta. Eu tenho 36 anos.

Nationality Marital Status


I am French. I am single.
Eu sou francesa. Eu sou solteira.

We can also use the verb to be followed by an adjective to talk about


permanent or temporary physical characteristics and feelings.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

I am thirsty.
Eu estou com sede.
(It’s a state. Something I am experiencing now.)

I am skinny.
Eu sou magro(a).
(It refers to a physical characteristic.)

< voltar para o índice


318
The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about permanent or
temporary qualities or states, personal characteristics, or mood.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

I am stressed. I am a stressed person.


Eu estou estressado(a). Eu sou uma pessoa estressada.
(It’s a current mood or a temporary state.) (It’s part of my personality.)

The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about time and dates.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

It’s eleven o’clock. Our meeting is on December 3rd.


São onze horas. A nossa reunião é no dia 3 de dezembro.

We can use the verb to be in the simple present to refer to places and locations as well.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

I am at the mall. The 9/11 Memorial is in Manhattan.


Eu estou no shopping. O memorial do 11 de Setembro é em Manhattan.

And now you know when and why we use the verb to be in the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


319
Spelling Rules –
-ING Forms
There are spelling rules for the -ING form in English, which means that
the way we write the verbs will change according to certain rules.
The general rule for the -ING form is that you just add the suffix -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS


General Rule – Add -ING.

watch watching
assistir assitindo

do doing
fazer fazendo

There are also some special cases. If the verb ends in an E, drop the
E and add -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS


Special Cases

Verbs ending in -E Drop the -E and add -ING

take taking
pegar; levar pegando; levando

make making
fazer fazendo

< voltar para o índice


320
When the verb has one syllable and ends in CVC, that means, consonant plus
vowel plus consonant, we will usually double the last consonant and add -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS


Special Cases

One-syllable verbs Double the last consonant


ending in CVC and add -ING

run running
correr correndo

get getting
pegar pegando

swim swimming
nadar nadando

However, if the one-syllable verb that ends in CVC finishes in W, X, or Y,


there will be no double consonant, we will just add -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS


Special Cases

CVC ending in Y, W, and X Add -ING

enjoy enjoying
gostar; aproveitar gostando; aproveitando

show showing
mostrar mostrando

fix fixing
consertar consertando

< voltar para o índice


321
In the case of two-syllable verbs ending in CVC, there are two rules.
If they end in a stressed syllable, we’ll double the last consonant and add -ING.
If the last syllable is unstressed, we’ll just add -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS


Two-syllable Verbs Ending in CVC

Last syllable is stressed

commit committing
(se comprometer) (se comprometendo)

Last syllable is unstressed

whisper whispering
(sussurrar) (sussurrando)

For the verbs ending in IE, we replace IE with Y and add -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS


Special Cases

Ending in IE Change IE for Y and add -ING



die dying
morrer morrendo

lie lying
mentir mentindo

tie tying
amarrar amarrando

Now you know the spelling rules for the -ING forms.

< voltar para o índice


322
Subject Pronouns
Subject pronouns are personal pronouns that replace nouns that work as the
subject of the sentence. Let’s take a look at them:
First person pronouns are the ones used to refer to the person speaking;
second person pronouns refer to the person we are talking to; and third person
pronouns, to the people or objects we are talking about.

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS

Singular Plural

I we
First person
eu nós

you you
Second person
tu/você vós/vocês

he
ele ( pessoa)

she they
Third person
ela ( pessoa) eles/elas

it
ele/ela (exceto pessoas)

Let’s start analyzing the first person pronouns, the ones that refer to the person
who is talking.
The first person singular pronoun (I) is always written with a capital letter,
regardless of its position in the sentence. Capitalization does not happen with
any other pronoun in English, not even with the first person plural (we).

< voltar para o índice


323
SUBJE CT PRONOUNS
First Person

I am her friend.
Eu sou amigo(a) dela.
(first person singular pronoun I) We are friends.
Nós somos amigos.
(first person plural pronoun we)

Karen and I work at the same company.


Karen e eu trabalhamos na mesma empresa.
(first person singular pronoun I)

That was the moment we decided to quit the job.


Foi nesse momento que nós decidimos deixar o emprego.
(first person plural pronoun we)

For the second person, the subject pronoun you will be used both in the singular
and in the plural. You always refers to the person or the people you are talking to.
Therefore, the context will tell you whether it is singular or plural.

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS
Second Person

You are a teacher.


Você é professor.
(second person singular pronoun you)

You are teachers.


Vocês são professores.
(second person plural pronoun you)

< voltar para o índice


324
The third person is used to refer to the people or objects we are talking about. In the
third person singular, there are two pronouns used to refer to people, and, in some
cases, to pets: he and she. “He” is used for the masculine; and “she,” for the feminine.

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS
Third Person Singular (He/She)

John is a teacher. He is very good.


O John é professor. Ele é muito bom.
(third person singular masculine pronoun he)

Sarah is an actress. She is great.


A Sarah é atriz. Ela é ótima.
(third person singular feminine pronoun she)

For all the other cases, we will use the other third person singular pronoun, it;
that is, to talk about any other thing in the singular.

SUBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)

Turn off the computer. It’s too hot.


Desligue o computador. Ele está muito quente.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it)

Turn the TV down. It’s loud.


Abaixe a televisão. Ela está alta.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it)

Notice that, in the examples we have just seen, the reference of the pronoun it is
clear in the sentence. It refers to the computer in the first example, and to the TV in
the second one.
But the pronoun it will also be used as a subject in sentences that have an
impersonal subject. This impersonal use of it introduces new information, and it is
used particularly to talk about time, dates, the weather, and opinion.
When it has an impersonal function, it does not refer to a previously mentioned
noun. In this case, the pronoun it simply works as the subject of the sentence.

< voltar para o índice


325
Take a look at the following examples:

SUBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)

It’s a pleasure to be here.


É um prazer estar aqui.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

It’s hot today.


Está quente hoje.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

It’s late.
Está tarde.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

For the third person plural, there is only one pronoun: they. This is the plural form of the pronouns he, she,
and it—meaning this pronoun can be used to refer both to people and objects.

SUBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Plural (They)

They are good teachers. They are great students.


Elas são boas professoras. Eles são ótimos alunos.
(third person plural pronoun they) (third person plural pronoun they)

They are good books.


São bons livros.
(third person plural pronoun they)

And now you know how to use subject pronouns in English.

< voltar para o índice


326
Will
The modal verb will is mostly used to refer to the future. As all modal verbs,
it functions as an auxiliary verb, adding meaning to the main verb.
Check the structures for the affirmative, interrogative, and negative forms.

WILL
Structure

Affirmative

She will go to college next year.


Ela vai para a faculdade ano que vem.

Subject + Will + Main Verb in the Base Form +


Complement (if necessary)

Negative

Will you talk to her?


Você vai falar com ela?

Will + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form +


Complement (if necessary)

Interrogative

It won’t rain.
Não vai chover.

Subject + Will + Not (Won’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form +


Complement (if necessary)

< voltar para o índice


327
Will is commonly used to express willingness and decisions about
the future that we make at the moment we speak.

WILL
Uses

Willingness and Decisions

I’ll (I + will) get the door.


Eu vou abrir a porta.

I will quit smoking.


Eu vou parar de fumar.

In the interrogative, we can use will to tell people what to do or to


make proposals. We can also use it for promises in affirmative and
negative sentences.

WILL
Uses

Tell people what to do

Will you behave now?


Você vai se comportar agora?

Make an offer / a proposal

Will you marry me?


Você quer se casar comigo?

Promises

I will always be with you.


Eu sempre estarei com você.

< voltar para o índice


328
It can be used to express refusal in the negative form.

WILL
Uses

Refusal

I won’t (will + not) talk to her.


Eu não vou falar com ela.

She won’t talk to anybody.


Ela não vai falar com ninguém.

Will is also used to refer to things that are inevitable.

WILL
Inevitability

You’ll have to attend driving classes to get your driver’s license.


Você terá que fazer aulas de direção para tirar a carteira de motorista.

Now you know that will is a modal auxiliary verb,


and you are familiar with its structures and common uses.

< voltar para o índice


329
Version 5.0

You might also like